Você está na página 1de 242

fkpqor`qflk=j^kr^i

ORjriqf=mirp
m~=kK=VNMJOPN_
PLOMLMQ

`= =OMMN=J=OMMQ==oLa=qI=fK=^==K
k=~===~~=~====~==~====~=~I=
==~~I==I=I===~=~=
~=~=~=I======m~~Jkaq qjI==
===~K=c=~I=~W=]m~~JkaqKK
l==~=====~==~~====
~I=~=~===~==K
m~~I=m~~JkaqI=~==m~~Jkaq==~=~~=
m~~=fK
m===r=p~==^~

t~~

Warranty
The Model 25MULTI PLUS Ultrasonic Gage has been designed and manufactured as a
precision instrument. Under normal working conditions it will provide long, troublefree service.
Damage in transit: Inspect the unit thoroughly immediately upon receipt for evidence
of external or internal damage that may have occurred during shipment. Notify the
carrier making the delivery immediately of any damage, since the carrier is normally
liable for damage in shipment. Preserve packing materials, waybills, and other shipping
documentation in order to establish damage claims. After notifying the carrier, contact
PanametricsJkaqqj so that we may assist in the damage claims, and provide
replacement equipment, if necessary.
PanametricsJkaq guarantees the Model 25MULTI PLUS to be free from defects in
materials and workmanship for a period of two years (twenty-four months) from date of
shipment. The warranty only covers equipment that has been used in a proper manner as
described in this instruction manual and has not been subjected to excessive abuse,
attempted unauthorized repair, or modification. DURING THIS WARRANTY
PERIOD, PanametricsJkaq LIABILITY IS STRICTLY LIMITED TO REPAIR OR
REPLACEMENT OF A DEFECTIVE UNIT AT ITS OPTION. PanametricsJkaq does
not warrant the Model 25MULTI PLUS to be suitable for intended use, and assumes no
responsibility for unsuitability for intended use. PanametricsJkaq accepts no liability
for consequential or incidental damages including damage to property and/or personal
injury.
This warranty does not include the transducer, transducer cable, charger, or battery. The
customer will pay shipping expense to the PanametricsJkaq plant for warranty repair;
PanametricsJkaq will pay for the return of the repaired equipment. (For instruments not
under warranty, the customer will pay shipping expenses both ways.)
PanametricsJkaq offers an optional third year warranty coverage (at an additional cost),
under the same terms, at the time of purchase.
PanametricsJkaq reserves the right to modify all products without incurring the
responsibility for modifying previously manufactured products. PanametricsJkaq does
not assume any liability for the results of particular installations, as these circumstances
are not within our control.
THE WARRANTIES SET FORTH HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND ARE IN LIEU
OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES WHETHER STATUTORY, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED (INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND WARRANTIES ARISING FROM COURSE
OF DEALING OR USAGE OR TRADE.)

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

j=ORjriqf=mirp

q~==`

Table of Contents
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
List of Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
List of Figures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 About this Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Audience. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 Related Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 If You have Documentation Comments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7 Revision History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8 Technical Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

17
17
18
18
19
20
20
20
20

Defining Basic Gage Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


2.1 Summarizing Keypad Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Identifying Display Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Using the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Monitoring the Battery Charge. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 Charging the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6 Replacing the Battery Pack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7 Using AA Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8 Discussing Theory of Operation (Standard Measure Type). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.9 Factors Affecting Performance and Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21
21
27
29
29
29
30
30
31
33

Setting Up Single Measurement Operation and Calibaration . . . . . . . . . .


3.1 Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Making Thickness Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Choosing a Default or User-Defined Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4 Performing a Quick Setup (Single Measurement Mode Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5 Calibrating the Model 25MULTI PLUS (Standard MeasType) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.1
Velocity and Zero Calibration (Standard MeasType) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.2
Velocity Calibration Only (Standard MeasType) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.3
Zero Calibration Only (Standard MeasType) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.5.4
Calibrating the Gage for Mode 1 with Barrier Layer MeasType. . . . . .
3.5.5
Calibrating the Gage for Mode 2 with Barrier Layer MeasType. . . . . .
3.6 Adjusting the Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37
37
38
39
41
42
42
43
44
45
46
46

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

j=ORjriqf=mirp

3.7
3.8

Operating the Delay Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Operating the Zoom Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.1
Zoom in Mode 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.2
Zoom in Mode 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.8.3
Zoom in Mode 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.9 Using the Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10 Using the Multi-Measurement Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.1 Multi-Measurement Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.2 Active Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.10.3 Changing the Active Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

47
48
48
49
49
50
50
51
57
57

Managing Special Gage Functions and SP Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


4.1 Operating Gage Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.1
Selecting a Differential Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.2
Using the Measurement Display Update Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.3
Using the Minimum Thickness Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.4
Using the Maximum Thickness Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.5
Managing High/Low Alarms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.6
Changing the Thickness Resolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.7
Using the Thickness Display Hold/Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.8
Managing the Calibration Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.9
Freezing the Waveform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.10 Changing Rectification Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1.11 Selecting Metric Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Operating SP Modes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1
Managing the Measurement Setup Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Saving Key Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1
Operating the ID Overwrite Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2
Managing the Communication Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3
Managing the Gage Diagnostics Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4
Operating Gage Resets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.5
Using the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

61
61
61
63
65
66
68
72
73
73
73
74
74
74
75
79
80
81
84
86
88

Using Custom Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


5.1 Managing the Detect Mode Function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 MeasType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Defining a Setup Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Defining a Probe Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.5 Varying Pulser Power Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.6 Defining Maximum Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.7 Defining Initial Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.8 Defining TDG Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.9 Viewing the Main Bang Blank. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

89
89
91
91
91
92
92
93
94
94

q~==`

5.10 Viewing the Echo Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95


5.10.1 Echo 1 Detect and Echo 2 Detect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
5.10.2 Interface Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
5.10.3 Mode 3 Echo Blank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.10.4 Making Setup Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.10.5 Setting Up a Mode 1 Barrier Layer Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.10.6 Setting Up a Mode 2 Barrier Layer Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.10.7 Saving Setup Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
6

Managing the Datalogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105


6.1 Understanding the Datalogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
6.2 Organizing the Datalogger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.2.1
File Name Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.2.2
Identifier (ID Number) Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
6.2.3
File Name Header Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
6.2.4
Comment Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
6.3 Creating Data Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
6.3.1
Using the Model 25MULTI PLUS Standard Editing Commands . . . . 110
6.3.2
Creating Files from a Computer (using the optional
WIN25DL PLUS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
6.3.3
Creating Files from the Model 25MULTI PLUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
6.4 Opening a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
6.5 Copying a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
6.6 Deleting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
6.7 Editing/Renaming a File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.8 Creating or Editing Comment Tables from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
6.9 Creating or Editing Comment Tables from the Model 25MULTI PLUS . . . . . 141
6.9.1
Deleting Comments from a Comment Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
6.9.2
Copying a Note . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
6.10 Saving Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
6.10.1 Saving Thickness Readings in Single Measurement Mode . . . . . . . . . 144
6.10.2 Saving Thickness and Waveform. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
6.10.3 Saving Thickness Readings in Multi-measurement Mode. . . . . . . . . . 144
6.10.4 Saving Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
6.11 Using the Review ID Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
6.12 Using the Edit ID Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6.13 Erasing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
6.13.1 Erasing Data in the Active/Open File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
6.13.2 Erasing a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6.13.3 Erasing the Entire Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6.14 Using the Optional Bar Code Wand to Enter an ID Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
6.15 Generating Reports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154

Managing Communications / Data Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

j=ORjriqf=mirp

7.1

7.2
7.3
7.4

7.5
7.6

7.7
8

Transmitting Data to a Computer or Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


7.1.1
Sending Entire Files: Data Transfer from Gage to Computer
or Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2
Sending a Specific Range of ID Numbers from a
Specific File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3
Performing a Single Send of the Current Displayed Measurement
Data to a Computer or Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4
Sending a Snapshot of the Model 25MULTI PLUS Display to
a Computer (using the optional WIN25DL PLUS Interface Program)
7.1.5
Sending a Snapshot of the Model 25MULTI PLUS Display to
a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Receiving (Downloading) Files from a Computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Uploading/Downloading a Stored Transducer Setup to a Computer . . . . . . . . .
Setting up Serial Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1
Defining RS-232 Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.2
Setting up Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying Data Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Performing Datalogger and Communication Resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.1
Performing a Communication Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.6.2
Performing a DBase Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Using the Optional WIN25DL PLUS Interface Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

157
158
159
160
160
161
161
162
162
162
163
165
166
167
168
169

Maintaining and Troubleshooting the Model 25MULTI PLUS . . . . . . . . . 171


8.1 Providing Routine Gage Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
8.2 Maintaining Transducers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.3 Understanding Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.4 Resolving Battery and Charger Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
8.5 Resolving Measurement Problems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
8.6 Performing Diagnostic Self Tests. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
8.6.1
Performing a Keypad Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.6.2
Performing a Video Display Test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.6.3
Viewing the Hardware Status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
8.6.4
Viewing the Error Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
8.7 Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Appendix A - Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177


Appendix B - Sound Velocities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Appendix C - Serial Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Appendix D - Data Output Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Appendix E - Remote Control Via RS-232 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

q~==`

Appendix F - Accessories and Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231


Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Documentation Comments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

j=ORjriqf=mirp

NM

i==q~

List of Tables
Table 1
Table 2
Table 3
Table 4
Table 5
Table 6
Table 7
Table 8
Table 9
Table 10
Table 11
Table 12
Table 13
Table 14
Table 15
Table 16
Table 17
Table 18
Table 19

Typographic Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Revision History. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Keypad Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Calculating a Low/High Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Calculating a Percent Thickness Alarm Value. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Measurement Reset Default Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
DtectMode and EchWindow Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Computer or Printer Serial Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Model 25MULTI PLUS Output Formats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Information Displayed on the Model 25MULTI PLUS Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Setup Name and Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Setup Parameter Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Sound Velocities of Various Materials (Longitudinal Wave Velocity) . . . . . . . 191
Equipment Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Standard 36DL PLUS I/O Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Model 25DL PLUS Output Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Flag Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Command Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Accessories and Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

NO

i==c

List of Figures
Figure 1
Figure 2
Figure 3
Figure 4
Figure 5
Figure 6
Figure 7
Figure 8
Figure 9
Figure 10
Figure 11
Figure 12
Figure 13
Figure 14
Figure 15
Figure 16
Figure 17
Figure 18
Figure 19
Figure 20
Figure 21
Figure 22
Figure 23
Figure 24
Figure 25
Figure 26
Figure 27
Figure 28
Figure 29
Figure 30
Figure 31
Figure 32
Figure 33
Figure 34
Figure 35
Figure 36
Figure 37
Figure 38
Figure 39
Figure 40
Figure 41
Figure 42

Model 25MULTI PLUS Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Identifying Display Elements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Model 25MULTI PLUS Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Usual Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Initial Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Stored Transducer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Naming Convention Sample . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Waveform Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparing Normal Display to Zoom in Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparing Normal Display to Zoom in Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Comparing Normal Display to Zoom in Mode 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Waveform Screen View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display Large Font Screen View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Multi-Measure Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Multi-Measure Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Multi-Measure Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting Soft Contact Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Multi-Measure Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Setting PCT Mode Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Waveform Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Large Font Display Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal Differential Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Percent Ratio Differential Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Measurement Update Rate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Minimum Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Maximum Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Low Alarm Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the High Alarm Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting an Alarm Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying the Previous Thickness Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Loss/Growth Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting an SP Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Measurement Option from the SP Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Radix Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Displaying a Waveform Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Waveform Trace Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating the Supervisor Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Activating ID Overwrite Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Saving Measurements with Overwrite Protection activated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Communications Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing the Communication Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

21
28
32
35
35
38
39
39
48
48
49
49
51
51
52
52
54
54
55
56
58
59
62
62
64
65
67
68
69
69
70
72
75
76
77
77
78
79
80
80
82
82

NP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Figure 43
Figure 44
Figure 45
Figure 46
Figure 47
Figure 48
Figure 49
Figure 50
Figure 51
Figure 52
Figure 53
Figure 54
Figure 55
Figure 56
Figure 57
Figure 58
Figure 59
Figure 60
Figure 61
Figure 62
Figure 63
Figure 64
Figure 65
Figure 66
Figure 67
Figure 68
Figure 69
Figure 70
Figure 71
Figure 72
Figure 73
Figure 74
Figure 75
Figure 76
Figure 77
Figure 78
Figure 79
Figure 80
Figure 81
Figure 82
Figure 83
Figure 84
Figure 85
Figure 86

NQ

Detect Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Detect Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Detect Mode 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Pulser Power set to 30 Volts shows a smaller initial pulse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Pulser Power set to 110 Volts shows a larger initial pulse. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Maximum Gain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Initial Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
TDG Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Main Bang Blank position for Mode 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Main Bang Blank position for Mode 2 and 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Echo Window Setting for Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Echo Window Setting for Mode 2 and 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Echo 1 Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Negative Detection Steel Back by Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Positive Detection Plastic Bonded to Steel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Mode 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Gage Hanging up on Trailing Edge of Backwall 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
M3Blank Set Properly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Adjusting the Setup Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Detecting the Barrier Layer Material in Mode 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Detecting the Barrier Layer Material in Mode 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Displaying Recall Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Saving Recall Setups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Identifying Datalogger Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Creating a File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Creating a Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Organization of Character Cycle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Selecting the Create Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Selecting a File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Selecting an Incremental File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Enter Incremental File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Selecting a Sequential File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Entering Sequential File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Selecting a Sequential with Custom Point File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Entering Sequential with Custom Point File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
General Grid Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
One Grid for 75 Identical Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Different Named Grid for Each Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Selecting a 2D Grid File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Entering 2D Grid File Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Selecting a 2-D Grid with Custom Points File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Entering 2D Grid with Custom Points File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Selecting a 3-D Grid with Custom Points File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

i==c

Figure 87
Figure 88
Figure 89
Figure 90
Figure 91
Figure 92
Figure 93
Figure 94
Figure 95
Figure 96
Figure 97
Figure 98
Figure 99
Figure 100
Figure 101
Figure 102
Figure 103
Figure 104
Figure 105
Figure 106
Figure 107
Figure 108
Figure 109
Figure 110
Figure 111
Figure 112
Figure 113
Figure 114
Figure 115
Figure 116
Figure 117
Figure 118
Figure 119
Figure 120
Figure 121
Figure 122
Figure 123
Figure 124
Figure 125
Figure 126
Figure 127
Figure 128

Entering 3D Grid File Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Selecting a 3-D Custom File Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering 3-D Custom File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Open Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Opening a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Copy Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Delete Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Deleting an Active File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Edit-Rename Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering New File Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Entering Information for the Comment Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Note-Copy Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Note to Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Copying a Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMS1 (0.2246 in.) Active Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMS2 (0.0088 in.) Active Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AMS3 (0.1598 in.) Active Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a Comment from the Notes Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying the Review ID Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of Screen if Edited ID is Not in the Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Resets Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the DBase Reset Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warning Message when Resetting DBase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Reports Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the File Summary with Stats Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a File to View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing File if Min/Max Summary is Selected. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing File if File Comparison is Selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Send Option from the File Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting a File to Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Identifying a Range of ID Numbers to Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Communication Option from the SP Mode Menu . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing Communication Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Communication Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Resets Option from the SP Mode Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting Communications Reset. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting the Resets Option from the SP Mode Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selecting DBase Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Confirming DBase Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Viewing the Hardware Status Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

131
133
134
135
136
137
137
138
138
139
140
140
141
142
143
143
145
145
146
147
149
151
152
153
153
154
155
155
156
156
158
158
159
164
164
166
167
167
168
168
169
174

NR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

NS

m~

Preface
The preface provides the following introductory topics:

1.1

Product Description

About this Document

Audience

Typographic Conventions

Related Documentation

If You have Documentation Comments

Revision History

Technical Help

Product Description
The Panametrics-NDTTM Model 25MULTI PLUS is a hand-held ultrasonic thickness gage
with an A-Scan display. This precision microprocessor-based instrument uses pulse-echo
techniques to measure material thickness when both sides of the test material are not easily
accessible. The gage can also measure sound velocity and pulse transit time in most solids
and liquids.
The Model 25MULTI PLUS is designed with one basic goal in mind simplicity of
operation. The gage uses three modes of operation plus an A-Scan display to allow the use
of contact, delay line and immersion transducers.
The gage also has a feature called Application Recall, which simplifies gaging by
allowing the use of both Stored Standard and Custom Stored Application Setups. In
general, one of the 25 Stored Setups is adequate for most applications. If, however, your
application requires a special setup, the 25MULTI PLUS offers 35 Custom Setup
locations. You can program custom setups or have Panametrics-NDT program the setups
for you.
The Model 25MULTI PLUS has an internal datalogger that can store over 18,000 fully
documented thickness measurements, or 1,750 thickness readings with waveforms. The
user identifies each measurement reading with an alphanumeric identification number up
to 16 alphanumeric characters in length. The identification number represents a physical
location, as determined by the user. The gage increments the identification numbers
automatically for each reading, or you can access any alphanumeric location randomly.
This incremental process allows for maximum flexibility and easy review of the stored
thickness readings for each location.
The Model 25MULTI PLUS also comes equipped with an RS-232 communications port.
This communication port allows the 25MULTI PLUS to interface with a computer or
printer to download thickness readings, or to remotely setup and calibrate the Model
25MULTI PLUS from a host computer.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Other features include:

Thickness range: 0.004-20.000" (0.080-500mm), dependent on material and


transducer type

Backlit display

High-Low Alarm functions

Differential Mode

Maximum Resolution of 0.0001" (0.001mm)

Display HOLD/BLANK Mode

Measurement in inches or millimeters with instant conversion

Multiple Languages (English, French, German, Spanish)

MIN/MAX Mode

Rugged case and sealed, color-coded keypad provides tactile and audible feedback

Semi-Automatic Keyboard Calibration

Internal Self-Test Modes

Keypad Lockout functions prevents accidental changing of calibration or


measurement parameters

In addition, special prompts inform the user of instrument conditions such as


measurement mode, low battery, loss of signal, calibration mode, data stored with
location identification, alarms, and differential mode.
Panametrics-NDTTM offers a variety of broadband contact, delay line and immersion
transducers for use with the Model 25MULTI PLUS to permit optimum application of the
gage on most engineering materials. For applications assistance, consult PanametricsNDT.

1.2

About this Document


This document is the Instruction Manual for the Model 25MULTI PLUS. The Instruction
Manual describes routine tasks for operating the Model 25MULTI PLUS. These tasks
include operating the Model 25MULTI PLUS, configuring system parameters, managing
system functions, and calibrating the Model 25MULTI PLUS.

1.3

Audience
This document is intended for any operator using the Model 25MULTI PLUS.
Panametrics-NDTTM recommends that all operators have a thorough understanding of the
principles and limitations of ultrasonic testing. We assume no responsibility for incorrect
operational procedure or interpretation of test results. We recommend that any operator
seek adequate training prior to using this equipment. Panametrics-NDT offers a full range
of training courses including Level I and Level II Ultrasonic Testing, Advanced

NU

m~

Detection and Sizing, and Ultrasonic Thickness Gaging. For further information
regarding training courses, contact Panametrics-NDTTM.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

1.4

Typographic Conventions
The following notes and table provide a list of the typographic conventions that appear in
this document.

Warning:

This information indicates danger and the possibility of personal


injury.

Caution: This information indicates that loss of data or equipment damage can occur.

Note:

This information provides explanatory information.

Tip:

This information provides helpful guidelines for easy operation.

Convention

Description

Courier Font

Used for file names, lines of code, names of


processes, and commands.

Heavy courier

Used for command line user input.

Bold

Used for textual parts of graphical user


interface, including menu items, buttons,
toolbar names, modes, options, and tabs.

Italics

Used for screen/window names, dialog


boxes and document titles.

Bold Italics

Used for emphasis.

[Bold] (Square Brackets with


Bold)

Used for instrument keys on the keypad.

<Italics> (Angle Brackets)

With italics text, used for variable data.

Used for showing the next sequential step.

Table 1

OM

Typographic Conventions

m~

1.5

Related Documentation
The Model 25MULTI PLUS works with the optional WIN25DL PLUS Interface
Program. For more information about this software program, refer to the following
instruction manual:

1.6

WIN25DL PLUS Interface Program, Part Number 910-222

If You have Documentation Comments


Panametrics-NDTTM is always interested in improving its documentation. We value your
comments about this manual and other Panametrics-NDT documentation.
Simply fill out the survey at the back of this manual and send your documentation
comments to Panametrics-NDT by using one of the following methods:

Send comments to Panametrics-NDT, Attention: NDT Marketing Department,


Technical Publications

Email us at: info@Panametrics-NDT.com.

In all your correspondence, please include the title of the document, its part number,
release date, and the specific section upon which you are commenting.

1.7

Revision History
This document may require updating because of corrections or changes to the product.
Publication dates, printed on the front cover, are updated when a change is made to this
document. In addition, the document number is also changed to reflect the revision.
The table below shows a list of all revisions for this document.

Date

Issue

Release version

November, 2001

910-231A

First release.

November, 2002

910-231B

Second release.

March, 2004

910-231B

Edit.

Table 2

1.8

Revision History

Technical Help
Call Panametrics-NDTTM and ask for a sales engineer to assist you.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

ON

j=ORjriqf=mirp

OO

a=_~=d~=l~

Defining Basic Gage Operation


This chapter describes how to get started using basic Model 25MULTI PLUS operations.
Topics are as follows:

2.1

Summarizing Keypad Functions

Identifying Display Elements

Using the Battery Pack

Monitoring the Battery Charge

Charging the Battery Pack

Replacing the Battery Pack

Using AA Batteries

Discussing Theory of Operation

Summarizing Keypad Functions

Figure 1

Model 25MULTI PLUS Keypad

The figure above shows the full keyboard layout. Refer to the following table that lists all
the keystroke functions available from the Model 25MULTI PLUS keyboard.
The table lists functions in two groups. The first group consists of single keystroke
functions and the second group consists of multiple keystroke functions. Unless otherwise
noted, keys shown boxed together are pressed sequentially.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

ON

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Key

Key Color

Function

Green

Power On/Off - Turns the


gage on and off.

Yellow

Zero/Thin - Compensates for


transducer zero or enables
step block zero calibration.

Yellow

Cal - Switches the gage into


the semi-automatic step block
Calibration mode.

Yellow

Vel/Thick - 1) Displays and


enables changing the sound
velocity calibration for a
particular material. 2) In ID
Edit mode only, the [VEL]
key deletes the character at the
cursor.

Yellow

Numeric Keys - Enter


numeric values from
0-9.

Red

Meas/Reset - Completes the


current operation and
switches the gage to
Measurement mode.

Blue

Range - Changes the


waveform display range to the
next available value.

Blue

Zoom - 1) Changes the


waveform display range so
that the region immediately
surrounding the measured
echo is shown at maximum
magnification. 2) In the ID
Edit mode only, the [ZOOM]
key inserts a blank space at the
cursor.

Table 3

OO

Keypad Definitions

a=_~=d~=l~

Key

Table 3

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Key Color

Function

Blue

Freeze - Causes the displayed


waveform to immediately
hold until reset.

Orange

Recall Setup - Allows


recalling a stored default or
custom transducer setup.

Orange

Backlight - Controls the


waveform display Backlight.

Gray

Enter - Used to select


highlighted items and accept
entered values.

Green

Up Arrow - 1) Adjusts the


value of a selected parameter
upward. 2) Selects the next
higher entry in a chosen list.

Green

Down Arrow - 1) Adjusts the


value of a selected parameter
downward. 2) Selects the next
lower entry in a chosen list.

Green

Left Arrow - 1) Lowers the


value of a selected parameter.
2) Moves the character and
highlights the cursor one
space to the left during the ID
Edit mode.

Green

Right Arrow - 1) Increases


the value of a selected
parameter. 2) Moves the
character and highlights the
cursor one space to the right
during the ID Edit mode.

Brown

File - Opens File Options box


where you can Open Files,
Create Files, Copy Files,
Delete Files, Send Files, Edit/
Rename Files, Generate
Reports.

Keypad Definitions (Continued)

OP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Key

Key Color

Function

Brown

Save - Stores measurements/


waveforms in the datalogger
at the current ID number.

Tan

Send - Initiates transmission


of stored data to a computer or
printer.

Tan

ID# (Identification
Number) - Allows access to
several functions related to
changing ID numbers.

Gray

2ND F - When pressed with a


key that has dual functions
(the main function written on
the key; the secondary
function written above the
key), the secondary function
becomes active.

Multiple Keypress Functions


Gray

Escape - Escapes from any


function without changing
data or parameters and returns
to the Measure mode.

Red

Gray

Orange

Gray

Yellow

Table 3

OQ

Keypad Definitions (Continued)

LCD Contrast Adjustment Enables adjusting the


waveform display contrast
using the up and down arrow
keys.

Setup Adjust - Enables


adjustments to a transducer
setting.

a=_~=d~=l~

Key

Key Color

Function

Gray

IN/MM - Toggles the


measurement units between
inches and millimeters.

Yellow

Gray

Blue

Gray

Yellow

Gray

Yellow

Gray

Yellow

Table 3

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Rectification Type - Cycles


among the available types of
waveform rectification i.e.,
full-wave, negative halfwave, positive half-wave, or
unrectified RF.
Setup Mode (SP Mode) Allows user to modify gage
parameters and perform
special test functions.
Options in the Setup Mode
include:
Measurement Setup
Communication
Setup
Diagnostic Self Tests
Resets
Clock Section
Resolution - Toggles
thickness display resolution
between default.
Standard: 0.001in or
00.01mm
High: 0.0001in or 0.001mm
Low: 0.01in or 0.1mm
Status - Shows an
information screen with the
following data:
1) Software version
2) Available memory
3) Error explanation, if
applicable

Keypad Definitions (Continued)

OR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Key

Key Color

Function

Gray

Waveform - Stores a
measurement and waveform
in the datalogger at the current
ID#.

Orange

Gray

Print - Prints an image of the


display including the
waveform with the current
thickness.

Tan

Gray

Notes - Allows you to create


or select comments to store at
an ID# location.

Tan

Gray

Tan

Gray

Yellow

Gray

Yellow

Table 3

OS

Keypad Definitions (Continued)

Clear Memory - An
alternative method to erase an
entire file. Also used to erase a
range of data in a file or a
single ID# location.

Hold/Blank Thickness
Display - Toggles between
holding and blanking the
thickness display during an
LOS condition.

Alarm - Views, enables, and


allows changing Alarm
setpoints.

a=_~=d~=l~

Key

Key Color

Function

Gray

Differential - Views, enables


and allows changing the
Differential Reference Value.

Yellow

Gray

Yellow

Gray

Measure Rate - Allows you


to change the measurement
rate by using the up and down
arrows. The selected
measurement rate is displayed
in the message window. To
remove message from
displays, press [MEAS].
Min/Max Measure - Selects
Minimum Measure mode,
Maximum Measure mode,
or Default Measure mode.

Yellow

Yellow

Calibration Lock - Controls


the calibration key lock.

Yellow

Table 3

2.2

Keypad Definitions (Continued)

Identifying Display Elements


The gage screen is a Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) and best viewed from straight above or
slightly below the surface rather than from the side. The display may be slow at
temperatures below 32oF (0oC). The figure below identifies the various sections of the
Model 25MULTI PLUS display.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

OT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

ID Location

Download Flag

File Name
Date and Time

Stored Thickness

Comments/ID#
Freeze Flag

Measurement Marker

Zoom Flag
Delay
Rectification
Setup Adjustment

Q Bar

Min/Max

Range
Setup Value

Alarm

Units
Meas Mode/Update

Thickness
Available Keys Box

Battery Life

Help Text

Figure 2

Identifying Display Elements

General Information: The main function of the display is to show the echo waveform and
to display the thickness reading received by the transducer as measurements are made.
The received echoes are amplified before being shown on the display. The waveform trace
is called the A-Scan display. This type of waveform allows a skilled operator to verify that
the gage signal being used to make a thickness measurement is the correct backwall echo
and not a noise, material anomaly, or the second multiple echo. This verification
waveform along with all pertinent calibration information can be stored with the thickness
value in the internal datalogger. An experienced operator can also use the echo waveform
to learn more about the quality of the measurement than is given just by the thickness
value, which includes observation of indications that may be too small to be measured by
the gage.
Press the [FREEZE] key to freeze the display. Adjust the thickness range (horizontal
scale) or expand the measured echo by using the Zoom mode.
When operating in the Minimum or Maximum Measure mode, the waveform associated
with a minimum or maximum reading is internally captured and recalled to the screen
when the transducer is uncoupled. Furthermore, any waveform that is stored in the
datalogger memory can be shown on the waveform display for review or comparison to
the current measured waveform. Such recalled waveforms may have been recently saved
or may have been downloaded from a computer data file.
Thickness Display: The top portion of the display shows the current Filename, ID
number, Comments, and any previous stored thickness values.

OU

a=_~=d~=l~

The lower part of the display functions as a general purpose thickness measurement
display; as a control panel for calibrating and setting up the gage, in addition to displaying
status conditions, error messages and warnings. The large characters are used to show
numerical values such as thickness and velocity. This area also shows flags that describe
the numeric data and/or the gage operating modes, and the battery status.

2.3

Using the Battery Pack


The Model 25MULTI PLUS Gage is powered by an internal 6V battery pack using
rechargeable NiCad batteries or 6 AA alkaline batteries. The NiCad battery pack is
recharged through the Model 36CA PLUS Charger/AC Adapter unit that is supplied with
the gage. The 36CAPLUS does not recharge the alkaline batteries; you must replace the
alkaline batteries after discharging. The Model 25MULTI PLUS can also be operated
directly from AC power using the Charger/Adapter.
The batteries are fully charged when shipped, but for maximum operating time, recharge
before using. Recharge batteries only with the Model 36CA PLUS Charger/Adapter
supplied with the gage. Other chargers may reduce battery life and/or damage the
battery and void the warranty on the gage.
Even a discharged battery maintains the internal stored calibration values and thickness
data for several weeks. However, to maintain optimum battery life, do not leave
discharged batteries for long periods of time.

2.4

Monitoring the Battery Charge


The battery charge indicator, or battery status meter, displays the percentage of battery
remaining capacity in bottom right hand corner of the display. Remember that if the
battery is charged for at least 2 hours, then 99% charge indication corresponds to over 25
hours of operation. However, if the battery is charged for less than 2 hours, then 99%
charge indication corresponds to proportionally fewer hours of operation.
Note:

2.5

The battery charge indicator shows a rotating bar when the when the charger
is plugged in; however, it cannot be used to indicate when full charge is
reached while charging. The gage displays a C indicating that the battery is
charging. The gage displays a S indicating that charging is complete.

Charging the Battery Pack


The gage operates for at least 25 hours between charges under normal conditions (4Hz
measure update rate in Mode 1 with the Backlight turned off.) The current battery status is
always indicated in the lower right corner of the gage display. This indicator shows a
percentage of the battery charge remaining. The maximum percentage that can be
displayed is 99%. (See Monitoring the Battery Charge on page 29.)
When the battery is insufficiently charged, the gage automatically powers off to prevent
damage to the battery. Recharge the battery using the Model 36CA PLUS charger.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

OV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

To charge the NiCad battery pack, plug the 36CA PLUS AC Charger Adapter into an
appropriate source of AC power, and plug the cable from the Charger/Adapter into the
charger socket on the top of the gage. The battery recharges whether the gage is OFF or
ON. Do not attempt to use the battery charge indicator to determine when batteries
have reached full charge. For a fully discharged battery, allow approximately 2 hours to
fully recharge. You can use the gage for normal measurements while the Charger/AC
Adapter is connected with little effect on the recharge time.

2.6

Replacing the Battery Pack


After several hundred recharges, the NiCad batteries lose the ability to hold a full charge.
To replace an old battery pack, follow these steps:
1. Open the battery panel on the back of the gage case by loosening the four captive
screws.
2. Remove the battery, once the case is open, by gently pulling the black strap at the right
end of the battery.
3. Remove the plug that connects the wire from the battery pack to the circuit board of
the gage.
4. Connect the new battery pack, and install with the label side facing outward.
5. Replace the battery panel and tighten the screws.
Note:

2.7

The internal memory is maintained for over an hour when the battery is
removed. If a new battery is installed in less than an hour, no calibration or
thickness data is lost.

Using AA Batteries
Non-rechargeable alkaline batteries are available for use with the Model 25MULTI
PLUS.
To replace the NiCad Rechargeable batteries with alkaline batteries, follow these steps:
1. Remove the NiCad pack.
2. Insert 6 AA Alkaline batteries into provided alkaline battery holder.
3. Connect the Alkaline battery holder to the gage using the same connector as the
NiCad.
4. Place the Alkaline holder into battery compartment.
5. Replace the battery panel and tighten screws.

PM

a=_~=d~=l~

Note:

2.8

It is also possible to charge the Nicad battery outside of the Model 25MULTI
PLUS using a special external battery charger adapter. Contact PanametricsNDT TM for more information on external battery charging.

Discussing Theory of Operation (Standard Measure


Type)
The Model 25MULTI PLUS operates on the Pulse/Echo principle. This principle works
by precisely timing the reflection of high frequency sound waves from the transducer to
the far wall of a test piece. This technique, derived from sonar, has been widely applied to
nondestructive testing because it permits accurate measurement of material thickness
even though access may be available from only one side.
The Model 25MULTI PLUS uses a variety of piezoelectric transducers that generate
bursts of mechanical vibrations, or sound waves, when excited by short electrical pulses.
The frequency of these sound waves is far beyond the limit of human hearing; from one
million to twenty million cycles per second, versus a typical limit of less than twenty
thousand cycles per second for the human ear. Sound at these very high frequencies does
not travel well through air, so a coupling medium such as a drop of liquid (usually
propylene glycol, glycerin, water, or oil) is used between the transducer and the test piece.
The sound waves generated by the transducer are coupled into the test piece and reflected
back from the opposite side. The same transducer then receives the reflected sound waves
and converts them into electrical pulses. The gage amplifies the received signal, digitizes
a selected portion of the wavetrain, and then very precisely measures a time interval
corresponding to one round trip of the sound waves in the test piece. This measurement is
made in one of three modes as described below. The gage, which has been calibrated to the
speed of sound in the test material, computes the thickness of the test material using the
relationship:

V ( t t0 )
x = ---------------------2

where:
x = the thickness of the material
V = the velocity of sound in the material
t = the measured round-trip transit time of the pulse
t0 = the zero offset factor (to correct for transducer wearplate delay, cable delay, and
other fixed delays)
The Model 25MULTI PLUS can employ any of three measurement modes to calculate
pulse transit time.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

PN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Mode 1: Use with contact transducers. In this mode, measurement is made from the initial
excitation pulse to the first returning echo from the backwall of the test piece. The MTI
marker indicates the Measured Time Interval.
Mode 2: Use with delay line and immersion transducers. In this mode, measurement is
made between an interface echo marking the time the sound wave enters the test piece and
the first backwall echo. The MTI marker indicates the Measured Time Interval.
Mode 3: Use with delay line and immersion transducers. In this mode, measurement is
made between two successive backwall echoes that follow an interface echo. The MTI
Marker indicates the Measured Time Interval.

Battery

Power
Supply

ROM

RAM

LCD

AGC
Amplifier

Pulser

Detector

Control and Measure

Keyboard

Transducer

Figure 3

PO

Charger

Model 25MULTI PLUS Block Diagram

RS-232 Output

a=_~=d~=l~

The figure above is a block diagram of the Model 25MULTI PLUS. The pulser, under the
control of the microprocessor, provides a unidirectional broadband spike voltage impulse
to a heavily damped broadband ultrasonic transducer. The broadband ultrasonic pulse
generated by the transducer is coupled to the test piece by means of liquid couplant.
Echoes returning from the back or inside surface of the test piece are received by the
transducer and converted to electrical signals, which in turn are fed to the receiver AGC
amplifier. The microprocessor-based control and timing logic circuits both synchronize
the pulser and select the appropriate echo signals that will be used for the time interval
measurement.
If echoes are not detected during a given measurement period, the gage will shut down to
save power until a new measurement cycle is required. If echoes are detected, the timing
circuit will precisely measure an interval appropriate for the selected Measurement
mode, and then repeat this process a number of times to obtain a stable, averaged reading.
The microprocessor then uses this time interval measurement, along with sound velocity
and zero offset information stored in the Random Access Memory (RAM), to calculate
thickness. Finally, the thickness is shown on the LCD and updated at a selected rate.

2.9

Factors Affecting Performance and Accuracy

Calibration: The accuracy of any ultrasonic measurement is only as good as the


accuracy and care with which the gage is calibrated. The gage is shipped from the
factory with standard setups for a number of transducers and applications. In some
cases, it is desirable to optimize these setups for specific measurement situations, as
described in Chapter 3. In all cases, it is essential that the velocity and zero
calibrations, described in Chapter 3, are performed whenever the test material or
transducer is changed. Periodic checks with samples of known thickness are
recommended to verify that the gage is operating properly.

Surface Roughness of the Test Piece: The best measurement accuracy is obtained
when both the front and back surfaces of the test piece are smooth. If the contact
surface is rough, the minimum thickness that can be measured will increase because of
sound reverberating in the increased thickness of the couplant layer. Additionally, if
either surface of the test piece is rough, the returning echo may be distorted due to the
multiplicity of slightly different sound paths seen by the transducer, and measurement
inaccuracies will result.

Coupling Technique: In Mode 1 (contact transducer) measurements, the couplant


layer thickness is part of the measurement and is compensated by a portion of the zero
offset. If maximum accuracy is to be achieved, the coupling technique must be
consistent. This is accomplished by using a couplant of reasonably low viscosity,
employing only enough couplant to achieve a reasonable reading, and applying the
transducer with uniform pressure. A little practice shows the degree of moderate to
firm pressure that produces repeatable readings. In general, smaller diameter
transducers require less coupling force to squeeze out the excess couplant than larger
diameter transducers.
In all modes, tilting the transducer distorts echoes and cause inaccurate readings, as
noted below.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Curvature of the Test Piece: A related issue involves the alignment of the transducer
with respect to the test piece. When measuring on curved surfaces, it is important to

PP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

place the transducer approximately on the centerline of the part and held as nearly
normal to the surface as possible. In some cases, a spring-loaded V-block holder is
helpful for maintaining this alignment. In general, as the radius of curvature
decreases, the size of the transducer is reduced, and the more critical transducer
alignment becomes. For very small radiuses, an immersion approach is necessary. In
some cases, it is useful to observe the waveform display via the PC Scope option as an
aid in maintaining optimum alignment. Practice with the aid of a waveform display
provides the operator a proper feel for the best way to hold the transducer.
On curved surfaces, it is important to use only enough couplant to obtain a reading.
Excess couplant forms a fillet between the transducer and the test surface where sound
reverberates and possibly creates spurious signals that can trigger false readings.

Taper or eccentricity: If the contact surface and back surface of the test piece are
tapered or eccentric with respect to each other, the return echo will be distorted due to
the variation in sound path across the width of the beam. Accuracy of measurement is
reduced. In severe cases, no measurement is possible.

Acoustic Properties of the Test Material: There are several conditions found in
certain engineering materials that can potentially limit the accuracy and range of
ultrasonic thickness measurements:

PQ

Sound Scattering: In materials such as cast stainless steel, cast iron, fiberglass,
and composites, sound energy will be scattered from individual crystallites in the
casting or boundaries of dissimilar materials within the fiberglass or composite.
Porosity in any material can have the same effect. Gage sensitivity must be
adjusted to prevent detection of these spurious scatter echoes. This compensation
can in turn limit the ability to discriminate a valid return echo from the back side
of the material, thereby restricting measurement range.

Sound Attenuation or Absorption: In many organic materials such as low density


plastics and rubbers, sound energy is attenuated very rapidly at the frequencies
used for ultrasonic gaging. This attenuation typically increases with temperature.
The maximum thickness that can be measured in these materials are often limited
by attenuation.

Velocity Variations: An ultrasonic thickness measurement is accurate only to the


degree that material sound velocity is consistent with gage calibration. Some
materials exhibit significant variations in sound velocity from point to point. This
happens in certain cast metals due to the changes in grain structure that result from
varied cooling rates, and the anisotropy of sound velocity with respect to grain
structure. Fiberglass can show localized velocity variations due to changes in the
resin/fiber ratio. Many plastics and rubbers show a rapid change in sound velocity
with temperature, requiring that velocity calibration be performed at the
temperature where measurements are made.

Phase Reversal or Phase Distortion: The phase or polarity of a returning echo is


determined by the relative acoustic impedances (density x velocity) of the boundary
materials. The gage assumes the customary situation where the test piece is backed by
air or a liquid, both of which have lower acoustic impedances than metals, ceramics,
or plastics. However, in some specialized cases (such as measurement of glass or
plastic liners over metal, or copper cladding over steel) this impedance relationship is
reversed, and the echo appears phase reversed. In these cases, it is necessary to change
the appropriate Echo Detection polarity, as discussed in Chapter 3, in order to
maintain accuracy.

a=_~=d~=l~

Material Backed by Air or


Water. Use Default Echo
Detect, NEG

Figure 4

Usual Case

Plastic or glass backed by


metal. Change Echo Etect
to POS

Figure 5

Special Case

A more complex situation can occur in anisotropic or inhomogeneous materials such


as coarse-grain metal castings or certain composites, where material conditions result
in the existence of multiple sound paths within the beam area. In these cases, phase
distortion can create an echo that is neither cleanly positive nor negative. Careful
experimentation with reference standards is necessary, in these cases, to determine
effects on measurement accuracy.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

PR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

PS

p=r=p=j~=l~=~=`~~~

Setting Up Single Measurement


Operation and Calibaration
This section demonstrates how to make basic thickness measurements with the Model
25MULTI PLUS. The unit ships from the factory set up with default conditions for the
transducer(s) you have purchased. You can change Setups easily after becoming familiar
with the more sophisticated features of the gage. The default conditions are selected to
facilitate gage usage for your applications. This section contains a detailed explanation of
these default conditions.
Topics are as follows:

3.1

Getting Started

Making Thickness Measurements

Choosing a Default or User-Defined Setup

Performing a Quick Setup (Single Measurment Mode Only)

Calibrating the Model 25MULTI PLUS (Standard MeasType)

Adjusting the Range

Operating the Delay Function

Operating the Zoom Mode

Using the Backlight

Using the Multi-Measurement Feature

Getting Started
To setup the Model 25MULTI PLUS for the first time, use the test block included with the
gage and the default settings, and follow these steps:
1. Plug the transducer cable into the transducer connector at the top end of the Model
25MULTI PLUS case.
2. Connect the transducer to the other end of the cable if it is not already connected.
3. Press the [ON/OFF] key to power on the gage.
Ensure that the probe type shown in the message window matches the transducer
you have attached to the gage. This part number is engraved on the back or side of the
transducer. (See Performing a Quick Setup (Single Measurement Mode Only) on
page 41 if the probe type does not match the transducer type.)

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

PT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Approximately 2.5 seconds after the gage is powered on, the following screen opens:

Figure 6

Initial Display Screen

4. The current units are indicated on the right of the thickness display. To change either
inches (IN) or millimeters (MM) to the alternate measurement unit, press the [2ND F]
key, then the [3] (IN/MM) key.
The gage is now ready to make measurements based on the default settings and the
included test block.
Note:

3.2

The procedure mentioned above is not a substitute for doing a proper


calibration.

Making Thickness Measurements


To begin making thickness measurements, follow these steps:
1. Apply couplant to the test block or material at the location to be measured.
In general, smooth material surfaces allow the use of thinner couplants such as
propylene glycol, glycerin, or water. Rough surfaces require more viscous couplant
such as gel or grease. See Appendix F - Accessories and Replacement Parts on page
231 for a list of available couplants.
2. Press the tip of the transducer to the surface of the material to be measured. Use
moderate to firm pressure and keep the transducer as flat as possible on the material
surface.
3. Read the material thickness on the gage display.
Note:

PU

For highest accuracy, you must perform both a velocity and zero calibration.
See Calibrating the Model 25MULTI PLUS (Standard MeasType) on page
42 for more information.

p=r=p=j~=l~=~=`~~~

3.3

Choosing a Default or User-Defined Setup


The Model 25MULTI PLUS uses a variety of transducers through the Application Recall
feature. There are 25 pre-defined and 35 user-defined application setups stored within the
gage. The pre-defined setups always remain in the gage as defaults and cannot be
removed. This section discusses how to choose an appropriate stored transducer setup and
how to calibrate the Model 25MULTI PLUS for a specific application.
To select a stored transducer setup, follow these steps:
1. Select a transducer for the desired application and connect it to the gage.
Note:

See Appendix A - Technical Specifications on page 177 to determine an


appropriate transducer. See Table 11 on page 185 as a guideline only; exact
thickness ranges will vary depending on the application.

2. While the gage is in the Measure mode, press [RECALL SETUP].

Figure 7

Selecting a Stored Transducer Setup

3. Press [ ] and [ ] to scroll through the available stored setups until the correct setup
for the application is highlighted. Below is an example of a default setup naming
convention and a complete list of available stored setup choices:
D E F M 1 - 2 0 . 0 / M 1 1 6
Default

Mode:
Mode 1
Mode 2
Mode 3

Material:
M-Metal
P-Plastic

Figure 8

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Probe Part
Number
Frequency

Naming Convention Sample

PV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Available stored setup choices:


ACTIVE
DEF1-20.0/M116
DEF1-10.0/M112
DEF1-5.0/M110
DEF1-5.0/M109
DEF1-2.25/M106
DEF1-10.0/M1016
DEF1-2.25/M1036
DEFM2-20.0/M208
DEFM3-10.0/M208
DEFP2-20.0/M208
DEFM2-10.0/M202
DEFM3-10.0/M202
DEFP2-10.0/M202
DEFP2-15.0/M205
DEFP2-15.0/V260
DEFM3-15.0/V260
DEFP2-5.0/M206
DEFM2-5.0/M206
DEFM3-5.0/M206
DEFP2-2.25/M207
DEFM2-2.25/M207
DEFM3-2.25/M207
DEFP2-20.0/M316
DEFM3-20.0/M316
DEFP2-10.0/M312
DEFM3-10.0/M312
USER -1
USER-2
USER-3
USER- 35

QM

p=r=p=j~=l~=~=`~~~

Note:

You can rename the setups listed as USER-1 through USER-35 for special
applications. See Using Custom Setups on page 89.

4. Press [MEAS] once the correct setup is highlighted. This action automatically recalls
the setup parameters for the chosen setup and brings you back to the Measure screen.
5. Begin taking measurements.

3.4

Performing a Quick Setup (Single Measurement


Mode Only)
Normally, custom application setups are changed by selecting the application setup list
using [RECALL SETUP]. Slew down to the desired setup name and press [MEAS]. This
process is adequate for typical setups that are changed infrequently. However, when it is
necessary to change frequently between two or more custom setups, a more direct shortcut procedure is available, known as Quick Setup.
When this Quick Setup procedure is activated, a single keystroke (held for a moment to
prevent errors) quickly switches to any of the first nine custom setups.
To activate the Quick Setup feature, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP Mode).
2. Press [

], [

], or [ENTER] to select Measurement.

3. Press [

] or [

] to select Quick Setup.

4. Press [

] or [

] to select On or OFF.

5. Press [MEAS] to return to Measure mode.


To change the active application setup to any of the first nine custom setups when Quick
Setup is activated, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold any numeric key [1] through [9] until the beep sounds (about 1 1/2
seconds). The momentary message USER N is now active and is displayed on the first
status line, and the active setup is changed to the displayed name.
Note:

USER-N refers to the Nth custom setup where N is the numeric key pressed.

2. Numeric keys may be used repeatedly in this way to quickly move between setups.
When preceded by the [2nd F] key, numeric keys always perform the indicated
second function, e.g. [2nd F], [5] selects MIN or MAX Measure mode even when
Quick Setup is activated. Quick Setup remains enabled until turned off by following
the procedure described in step 1 above.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

QN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

3.5

Calibrating the Model 25MULTI PLUS (Standard


MeasType)
Calibration is the process of adjusting the gage, prior to testing, to a known reference value
for a specific material and transducer. Calibrating the gage is always necessary before
measuring specific material by one of the methods described below. Remember, the
gages measurement accuracy is only as good as the calibration that is performed.
The Model 25MULTI PLUS calibration procedure falls into one of the following three
categories:

Velocity and Zero Calibration

Velocity Calibration Only

Zero Calibration Only

Note:

In sections 3.5.13.5.3, the following notes are applicable:


If a mistake is made or any problem is experienced during the calibration,
press [MEAS] and return to Step 1.
After completing Step 2, if the prompt CAL LOCK appears on the
bottom of the display instead of CAL, then unlock the calibration by
following the steps below:
- Press the [MEAS] key.
- Press the [6] and [3] keys simultaneously.
- The gage will beep and display a message, CAL LOCK is off at the
bottom of the gage.
- Repeat steps 1 and 2.

Caution: Save all changes made to Active Setups. Unsaved data will be lost when a
different application setup is recalled.

3.5.1

Velocity and Zero Calibration (Standard MeasType)


Velocity and Zero Calibration find both sound velocity and zero offset when you do not
know either of these elements. This calibration process requires two pieces of test material
of known thickness values, which are within the measurement range of both the
transducer and setup specifications. See Table 11 on page 185 for more information.
One of the test materials must be thicker than the other. The thicker piece, used to measure
velocity, should be equal to or greater than the upper range of thickness to be measured.
The thinner piece, used for the zero offset, should be equal to or less than the lower range
of minimum thickness to be measured.
To calibrate for the thickness range represented by these test samples, follow these steps:

QO

p=r=p=j~=l~=~=`~~~

1. Power on the gage and wait for the Measure screen display.
2. Place a drop of couplant on the surface of the thicker material sample, and couple the
transducer to the sample using moderate to firm pressure. A thickness reading appears
on the display whilethe LOS prompt in the upper right corner of the display
disappears.
3. Press [CAL] when a stable reading is on the display and the LOS prompt is not on the
screen. Observe the CAL (calibration) prompt on the display.
4. Remain coupled to the standard test piece and ensure that there is still a stable reading
on the display. Press [VEL]. A prompt appears on the display: Enter value for thick
standard.
5. Remove the transducer from the sample. The thickness value remains on the display.
6. Using the numeric keys on the gage, enter the actual known thickness of the test
material.
Continue with the following steps:
1. Put a drop of couplant onto the thin material sample and couple the transducer to it
using moderate to firm pressure.
2. Press [CAL]. A thickness reading appears on the display.
3. Remain coupled to the test piece and ensure that there is a stable reading on the
display. Press [ZERO]. A prompt appears on the display: Enter value for this
sample.
4. Remove the transducer from the sample. The thickness value remains on the display.
5. Using the numeric keys, enter the actual known thickness of the test material.
6. Press [MEAS] to finalize the calibration.
Note:

3.5.2

You can Lock the calibrated readings to ensure that it is not accidentally
changed. (Refer to Section 4.1.8Calibration Lock.) From the Measure
mode, press [3] and [6] simultaneously. The gage displays a message: CAL
LOCK is on...

Velocity Calibration Only (Standard MeasType)


Use the Velocity Calibration Only procedure when the gage is calibrated for a particular
transducer/material combination, and that same transducer is used with a different
material and sound velocity. The procedure requires test material of known thickness,
equal to or greater than the upper range of thickness to be measured.
To calibrate for the thickness range represented by this test sample, follow these steps:
1. Power on the gage and wait for the Measure screen display.
2. Place a drop of couplant on the surface of the test material, and couple the transducer
to the sample using moderate to firm pressure. A thickness reading appears on the
display while the LOS prompt in the upper right corner of the display disappears.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

QP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

3. Press [CAL] when a stable reading is on the display and the LOS prompt is off. The
gage displays a message: Couple to standard; press VEL or ZERO.
4. Remain coupled to the test piece and ensure that there is still a stable reading on the
display. Press [VEL]. A prompt appears on the display: Enter value for thick
standard.
5. Remove the transducer from the sample. The thickness value remains on the display.
6. Use the numeric keys to enter the actual known thickness of the sample being
measured.
7. Press [MEAS] to finalize calibration.
Note:

You can LOCK the calibrated readings to ensure that it is not accidentally
changed. (See Managing the Calibration Lock on page 73.) From the
Measure mode, press [3] and [6] simultaneously. The gage displays a
message: CAL LOCK is on...

If the sound velocity of the test material is known, then enter the velocity directly.
To enter a known velocity, follow these steps:
1. Turn the gage on and wait for the Measure screen.
2. Press [VEL]. The Velocity prompt appears and the gage displays the current sound
velocity.
3. Use the numeric keys to enter the new velocity.
4. Press [MEAS].

3.5.3

Zero Calibration Only (Standard MeasType)


Use the Zero Calibration Only procedure when the gage is calibrated for a particular
transducer/material combination, but the transducer is replaced and the test material
remains the same.
The Zero Calibration Only procedure requires test material of known thickness,
preferably near the lower end of the desired measurement range, but not below the gages
minimum measurement range for both the transducer and setup specifications.
To calibrate for the thickness range represented by this test sample, follow these steps:
1. Power on the gage and wait for the Measure screen display.
2. Place a drop of couplant on the surface of the material sample, and couple the
transducer to the sample using moderate to firm pressure. A thickness reading appears
on the display while the LOS prompt in the upper right corner of the display
disappears.
3. When a stable reading is on the display and the LOS prompt is off, press [CAL]. The
gage displays a message: Couple to standard; press VEL or ZERO.
4. Remain coupled to the test piece and ensure that there is still a stable reading on the
display. Press [ZERO]. A prompt appears on the display: Enter value for thin
standard.

QQ

p=r=p=j~=l~=~=`~~~

5. Remove the transducer from the sample. The thickness value remains on the display.
6. Use the numeric keys to enter the actual known thickness of the sample being
measured.
7. Press [MEAS] to finalize the calibration.
Note:

You can LOCK the calibrated readings to ensure that it is not accidentally
changed. (See Managing the Calibration Lock on page 73.) From the
Measure mode, press [3] and [6] simultaneously. The gage displays a
message: CAL LOCK is on...

If you know the zero offset number for a particular transducer, enter it directly. See
Velocity and Zero Calibration (Standard MeasType) on page 42 to determine the zero
number for a given transducer and calibrate the gage according to the procedure (See Zero
Calibration Only (Standard MeasType) on page 44 also.) Press [ZERO] to read the zero
offset number. Record this number for each probe for future reference.
Note:

You must use the same transducer cable lengths in order to maintain
accuracy of the zero offset number recorded for each probe. This rule is
especially true when using cable lengths over 10 ft. (approximately 3
Meters) in 0.0001" or 0.001mm resolution.

To enter a known zero offset number, follow these steps:


1. Power on the gage and wait for the Measure screen display.
2. Press [ZERO]. The gage displays the prompt: Enter value for zero. The gage
displays the zero offset number to which it is presently calibrated.
3. Use the numeric keys to enter the new zero offset.
4. Press [MEAS] to enter the new zero offset into the gage.

3.5.4

Calibrating the Gage for Mode 1 with Barrier Layer MeasType


Choose the proper setup for the Barrier Layer MeasType or to create a custom setup.
(See Setting Up a Mode 1 Barrier Layer Measurement on page 101.)
1. Press [CAL].
2. Couple to the included test block, either 0.500in or 15mm.
3. Press [CAL] when a steady reading is shown on the display. The gage stores this
reference echo in its internal memory and uses it for the advance Barrier Layer
algorithm.
4. Couple to a Barrier Layer sample where the thickness of the Barrier Layer is known
and press [VEL].
5. Uncouple the transducer and enter the known thickness of the barrier layer.
6. Press [MEAS].

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

QR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

When you are satisfied with the setup you can save the Custom setup. See Saving Setup
Parameters on page 103 so that is can be recalled or used in a Multi-Measurement.
Note:

3.5.5

If you do not save the custom setup, it will be lost if another setup is recalled.

Calibrating the Gage for Mode 2 with Barrier Layer MeasType


Choose the proper setup for the Barrier Layer MeasType or to create a custom setup. See
Setting Up a Mode 2 Barrier Layer Measurement on page 102.
1. Couple to a Barrier Layer sample where the thickness of the Barrier Layer is known.
Press [CAL].
2. Press [VEL] when a steady thickness reading is shown on the display.
3. Uncouple the transducer and Enter the known thickness of the barrier layer
4. Press [MEAS].
When you are satisfied with the setup, you can save the custom set up so that is can be
recalled or used in a Multi-Measurement. See Saving Setup Parameters on page 103.
Note:

3.6

If you do not save the Custom setup it will be lost if another setup is recalled.

Adjusting the Range


The range of the waveform display is the distance spanned by the horizontal axis of the
display in the non Zoom mode. (See Operating the Zoom Mode on page 48.) The left end
of the horizontal-axis is always zero thickness, and the right end is the thickness
representing the endpoint of the range unless the delay was adjusted. There are fixed
ranges available for each transducer frequency. The available ranges are also material
velocity dependent; for steel they are:

QS

English

Metric

0.10 in

2.0 mm

0.20 in

5.0 mm

0.30 in

8.0 mm

0.40 in

10.0 mm

0.50 in

15.0 mm

1.00 in

20.0 mm

2.00 in

50.0 mm

5.00 in

100.0 mm

p=r=p=j~=l~=~=`~~~

English

Metric

10.00 in

200.0 mm

20.00 in

508.0 mm

These selectable ranges let you adjust the thickness span of the waveform display to
encompass only the thickness range being measured and thus obtain maximum waveform
resolution for each application. The range setting affects the waveform display only. You
can still make measurements even when the display range does not encompass the
thickness being measured.
To change the range at any time the display is active, follow these steps:
1. Press [RANGE]. The waveform range changes to the next higher available range.
2. Continue to press [RANGE] until the desired range is obtained. The range value
recycles to the minimum range value following the maximum range value.
Tip:

3.7

Press [ ] prior to pressing [RANGE] to either increase or decrease the


range direction. You can change the range direction back to increasing
values by pressing [ ] prior to pressing [RANGE] again.

Operating the Delay Function


The Range Delay of the waveform display adjusts the beginning of the horizontal span in
the non Zoom mode. The left end of the horizontal-axis is normally set to zero thickness.
The Delay function allows you to adjust the left end of the horizontal axis so the waveform
can be centred over a portion of the waveform that occurs later in time. This function is
very useful when using delay line or immersion transducers or when measuring thick
material so that the measured echoes can be seen in greater detail.
To operate the Delay function, follow these steps:
1. Press [2ndF], [Range] (DELAY).
2. Press [

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

] or [

] to adjust the waveform Delay.

QT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Figure 9

3.8

Displaying the Waveform Delay

Operating the Zoom Mode


The Zoom mode allows the thickness region surrounding the measured echoes to expand
to full screen width. The resulting zoomed waveform depends on the Measurement mode
that the gage is using. The zoom adjusts the Range and Delay so the measured echoes are
on screen are shown in the greatest detail. The Zoom mode also tracks the measured
echoes adjusting the Range and Delay automatically, always keeping the measured
echoes on the waveform screen.

3.8.1

Zoom in Mode 1
Zoom in Mode 1 centers the first Backwall echo on the screen.

Figure 10

QU

Comparing Normal Display to Zoom in Mode 1

p=r=p=j~=l~=~=`~~~

3.8.2

Zoom in Mode 2
Zoom in Mode 2 adjusts the Waveform Range and Delay so that the Interface Echo and
First Backwall echo are shown on the Waveform screen.

3.8.3

Figure 11

Comparing Normal Display to Zoom in Mode 2

Note:

In the Zoom mode, the gage automatically adjusts the Range and Delay to
track the Interface and first Backwall echo. If you adjust the Range, the gage
remains at the selected Range and automatically adjusts the Delay to track
the Interface Echo.

Zoom in Mode 3
Zoom in Mode 3 adjusts the Waveform Range and Delay so that the Interface Echo and
Second Measured Backwall echoes are shown on the Waveform screen.

Not Zoomed
Figure 12

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Zoomed

Comparing Normal Display to Zoom in Mode 3

QV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Note:

3.9

In Zoom mode, the gage automatically adjusts the Range and Delay to track
the Interface and second Backwall echo. If you adjust the Range, the gage
remains at the selected Range and automatically adjusts the Delay to track
the Interface Echo.

Using the Backlight


The display has the greatest contrast when viewed in bright light. However, it is easily
readable in subdued light or even complete darkness by using the built-in backlight.
To activate the backlight, press the orange key with the lightbulb symbol. Deactivate the
backlight by pressing the lightbulb key again. See Managing the Backlight on page 78 for
more information.
Note:

Use the backlight only when needed because it drains the battery about three
times faster when activated.

The contrast of the display may require occasional readjustment. To adjust the waveform
display contrast, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [LIGHTBULB] (LCD ADJ)
2. Press [ ] to darken the display, or [ ] to lighten the display.
To stop adjusting the contrast, press [ENTER] or [MEAS]. This action disables the
[ ] and [ ] keys from adjusting the contrast.

3.10

Using the Multi-Measurement Feature


The Multi-Measurement feature of the 25Multi Plus allows the gage to display the
individual thickness layers of multi-layer materials. This feature can combine with the
Barrier Layer thickness mode to measure the thickness of Barrier layers in multi-layer
plastic containers. You have the option of displaying the multiple measurement along
with the waveform or showing all multi-layer measurements in large fonts.

RM

p=r=p=j~=l~=~=`~~~

Active measurement
flag

Waveform for active


measurement

AMS 4 or
Summation
AMS 1
AMS 2

AMS 3
Active measurement

3.10.1

Figure 13

Display Waveform Screen View

Figure 14

Display Large Font Screen View

Multi-Measurement Description
The 25MULTI PLUS has three different Multi-Measurement modes; Normal, Soft
Contact and PCT Measurement. Use the Normal mode and the PCT mode for a variety
of multi-layer applications, while the Soft Contact mode is specifically designed for
measuring Sagittal Height, Radius of Curvature and Lens thickness in soft contact lens
applications.
Normal Mode: Measure and display up to four different thickness layers or three layers
and the sum of any selected layers. The thickness measurements are displayed in either
inches or millimeters and can be saved to the internal Dataloger for later review or
transferred to a PC.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

RN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Soft Contact Mode: Use only for measuring soft contact lenses. This mode can display
Sagittal Height and Lens thickness, plus calculate the Radius of curvature of soft contact
lenses.
PCT Thickness Mode: Use for measuring Barrier layer measurement applications,
allowing the thickness of any layer to be displayed as a percentage of the total thickness.
Both thickness Values and Percentage of Total values can be saved in the internal
datalogger and transferred to a computer.

3.10.1.1

Operating Multi-Measurement Normal Mode


In order to view the thickness of individual layers a custom setup must be created and
saved for each of the individual thickness layers. See Using Custom Setups on page 89 for
information about creating custom setups.
Note:

All multi-layer measurement custom setups must use the same transducer
type.

To set parameters for the Normal mode, follow these steps:


1. Create and store Custom Setups for all the individual layer thicknesses.
2. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP Mode) and the SP Mode menu opens.

Figure 15

Selecting the Multi-Measure Option

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Multi-Measure option. Press [ENTER].


The Multi-Measure screen opens.

Figure 16

RO

Selecting Multi-Measure Parameters

p=r=p=j~=l~=~=`~~~

Continue with the following steps:


1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Enable option. Press [

] or [

2. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Mode option. Press [


3. Press [ ] to select the Sum Mode option. Press [
Note:

] to select On.

] or [
] or [

] to select Normal.
] to select On or Off.

The Sum mode mathematically adds and displays the sum of up to three
individual thickness layers.

4. Press [ ]to select the Display option. Press [


Large Font.

] or [

] to select Waveform or

Waveform displays the waveform with each active measuement and large font
displays all the thickness values in large font.
5. Press [ ] to select the Save Key option. Press [
increment Active.

] or [

] to select Active or Auto-

Active: Saves only the active measurement (the Thickness that is displayed in large
characters) into the datalogger.
Auto-increment Active: Saves the Active reading into the datalogger and then
changes the active setup to the next Setup in the Multi-Measurement List. To save all
the thickness values of the individual thickness layers into the datalogger, select
Auto-increment Active.
6. Press [ ] to select the SETUP 1 option. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Custom Setup
for the Measurement at AMS 1 setup Location. Selecting None shows no thickness at
the AMS1 location.
7. Press [ ] to select the SETUP 2 option. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Custom Setup
for the Measurement at AMS 2 setup Location. Selecting None shows no thickness at
the AMS2 location.
8. Press [ ] to select the SETUP 3 option. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Custom Setup
for the Measurement at AMS 3 setup Location. Selecting None shows no thickness at
the AMS3 location.
9. Press [ ] to select the SETUP 4 option. If Summation is not selected, press [ ] or
[ ] to select the Custom Setup for the Measurement at AMS 4 setup Location.
Selecting None shows no thickness at the AMS4 location.
If the Summation function is selected, then Setup 4 is replaced with Summation.
Press [ ] or [ ] and [ENTER] to select which thickness measurements to add
together and display at AMS 4.
10. Press [MEAS] to return to the measure mode with Multi-Measurement Active.

3.10.1.2

Operating Multi- Measurement Soft Contact Mode


In order to view the Sagittal Height, Lens thickness, and Radius of Curvature in MultiMeasurement mode a custom setup must be created and saved for the Sagittal Height and
Lens Thickness. The Radius of Curvature is calculated using the Sagital Height value and
the user input diameter of the pedestal.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

RP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

To set parameters for the Soft Contact mode, follow these steps:
1. Create and store Custom Setups for the Sagittal Height and Lens thickness
measurements.
2. Press [2nd F], [0], (SP Mode) and the SP Mode menu opens.

Figure 17

Selecting the Multi-Measure Option

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Multi-Measure option. Press [ENTER] and the MultiMeasure screen opens.

Figure 18

Setting Soft Contact Parameters

Continue with the following steps:


1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Enable option. Press [

] or [

2. Press [ ] to select the Mode option. Press [

] to select Soft Contact mode.

] or [

3. Press [ ]to select the Display option. Press [


Large Font.

] or [

] to select On.

] to select Waveform or

Waveform displays the waveform with each active measuement and large font
displays all the thickness values in large font.
4. Press [ ] to select the Save Key option. Press [
increment Active.

] or [

] to select Active or Auto-

Active: Saves only the active measurement (the Thickness that is display in large
characters) into the datalogger.

RQ

p=r=p=j~=l~=~=`~~~

Auto-increment Active: Saves the Active reading into the datalogger and then
changes the active setup to the next Setup in the Multi-Measurement List. To save all
the individual thickness layer thickness values into the datalogger select Autoincrement Active.
5. Press [ ]to select the SGTTL HT option. Press [
Setup for the Sagittal Height measurement.

] or [

] to select the Custom

6. Press [ ]to select the LENS THK option. Press [


for the Lens thickness measurement.

] or [

] to select Custom Setup

7. Press [ ]to select the PDSTL DIA option. Use the Numeric keypad to enter the
diameter of the pedestal being used.
8. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measure mode with Multi-Measurement active.

3.10.1.3

Operating Multi- Measurement PCT Mode


In order to view the thickness of individual layers, a custom setup must be created and
saved for each of the individual thickness layers.
Note:

All multi-layer measurement custom setups must use the same transducer
type.

To set parameters for the PCT mode, follow these steps:


1. Create and store Custom Setups for the each layer to be measured.
2. Press [2nd F], [0], (SP Mode) and the SP Mode menu screen opens.

Figure 19

Selecting the Multi-Measure Option

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Multi-Measure option. Press [ENTER] and the MultiMeasure screen opens.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

RR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Figure 20

Setting PCT Mode Parameters

To set the PCT mode parameters, follow these steps:


1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Enable option. Press [

] or [

2. Press [ ] to select the Mode option. Press [


mode.

] to select PCT Total THK

] or [

3. Press [ ]to select the Display option. Press [


Large Font.

] or [

] to select On.

] to select Waveform or

Waveform displays the waveform with each active measuement and large font
displays all the thickness values in large font.
4. Press [ ] to select the Save Key option. Press [
increment Active.

] or [

] to select Active or Auto-

Active: Saves only the active measurement (the Thickness that is display in large
characters) into the datalogger.
Auto-increment Active: Saves the Active reading into the datalogger and then
changes the active setup to the next Setup in the Multi-Measurement List. To save all
the individual thickness layer thickness values into the datalogger select Autoincrement Active.
5. Press [ ]to select the SETUP 1 option. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Custom Setup
to be used for the Measurement at AMS1 setup location. Selecting None shows no
thickness at the AMS1 location.
6. Press [ ]to select the SETUP 2 option. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Custom Setup
to be used for the Measurement at AMS2 setup location. Selecting None shows no
thickness at the AMS2 location.
7. Press [ ]to select the SETUP 3 option. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Custom Setup
to be used for the Measurement at AMS3 setup location. Selecting None shows no
thickness at the AMS3 location.
8. Press [ ]to select the Total option. Press [ ] or [ ] and [ENTER] to mark each
setup to add together to calculate the total thickness.

RS

p=r=p=j~=l~=~=`~~~

9. Press [ ]to select the Show Total option. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Yes or No.
Selecting Yes shows the calculated Total Thickness on the display while MultiMeasurement is active.
10. Press [ ]to select the Show As % option. Press [ ] or [ ] and [ENTER] to mark
each setup that is displayed as a Percentage of the total thickness.
11. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measure mode with Multi-Measurement active.

3.10.2

Active Measurement
When Multi-Measurement is Activated, you can choose which measurement is the Active
Measurement, such as:

the highlighted AMS location

the thickness measurement shown in the large thickness display

the displayed waveform

Note:

3.10.3

The following functions are global functions and apply to the Active
Measurement:
Alarms
Differential reference value
Save key
Min and Max mode

Changing the Active Measurement


When Multi-Measurement is activated, you can select which measurement is active on the
Waveform display screen by pressing [ ] or [ ].

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

RT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

AMS 1 is
the active
measurement

AMS 2 is
the active
measurement

Figure 21

Waveform Display Screen

When Mutli-Measurement is activated, you can select which Measurement is the active
measurement on the Large Font display screen by using the [ ] and [ ] arrow keys.

RU

p=r=p=j~=l~=~=`~~~

AMS 1 is
the active
measurement

ASM 2 is
the active
measurement

Figure 22

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Large Font Display Screen

RV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

SM

j~~=p~=d~=c=~=pm=j

Managing Special Gage Functions and


SP Modes
This chapter describes how to operate the Model 25MULTI PLUS using special functions
and modes.
Topics are as follows:

4.1

Operating Gage Functions

Operating SP Modes

Saving Key Selection

Operating Gage Functions


The Model 25MULTI PLUS has many thickness measurement features. Although the
features outlined in this section are not required for basic thickness operation, they can
make the gage a more powerful, versatile instrument.

4.1.1

Selecting a Differential Mode


The Model 25MULTI PLUS has two Differential modes

Normal Differential

Percent Ratio

Normal Differential: Shows the actual thickness along with the difference between the
actual thickness measurement and a user set reference value.
[(Normal Differential) = (Actual Thickness) (Differential Reference Value)]
The actual thickness appears on the thickness display and the differential thickness
appears in the differential display area. See the following figure:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

SN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Active Thickness
Differential Value

Figure 23

Normal Differential Mode

Percent Ratio: Shows the actual thickness along with the percent difference from a user
set reference value.
[(Percent Ratio)] = [(Actual Thickness) - (Differential Reference Value)] /(Differential
Reference Value)]*(100)
The actual thickness appears on the thickness display and the Percent Ratio thickness
appears in the differential display area as shown below:

Actual Value
Percent Differential

Figure 24

Percent Ratio Differential Mode

When you press [SAVE] while in Normal Differential or Percent Ratio the actual
thickness is saved along with the D flag, which indicates that the Differential mode is
active. The reference differential value is also stored in the setup table.
The units and resolution of the Differential thickness are the same as those selected for the
thickness measurement.
You can use the Differential mode in conjunction with Min/Max mode but it cannot be
used in conjunction with the Alarm mode.

SO

j~~=p~=d~=c=~=pm=j

Note:

In Multi-Measurement mode the Diff is calculated on the active


measurement (displayed in large character.)

To activate, view, set, change or select differential type, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [9] (DIFF) while in the Measure mode.
2. Press [ ], [ ], or [ENTER] to highlight a setting to be changed (Enable, Displayed,
or Ref Value.)
3. Press [

], [

], or [0]-[9] to change the highlighted setting.

4. Repeat from Step 1 to change another setting.


5. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measure mode with the displayed Differential settings,
or press [2nd F], [MEAS] at any time to return to the Measure mode with the original
Differential settings unchanged.

4.1.2

Using the Measurement Display Update Rate


The Measurement Display Update Rate is the rate that the measured thickness value and
waveforms are updated on the display, which can be adjusted between 4, 8, 12, 16, 20
measurements per second. Some of the update rates allow averaging without QBAR (see
note below), and averaging with QBAR. The default measurement rate is 4 measurements
per second.
Note:

Averaging is used for the highest degree of accuracy/stability. A five


measurement running average is calculated and displayed at the selected
measurement update rate.
The QBAR (quality bar), is an indicator of measurement stability shown to
the right of the thickness value. The length of the QBAR is proportional to
the measurement stability. A short QBAR indicates relatively unstable
readings that vary from one to the next. A long QBAR indicates stable
readings, that is, readings that do not vary from one another. Averaging with
QBAR aids in finding optimum transducer coupling in some applications.

A combination of the measured material, measurement rate setting, resolution selected,


transducer being used, speed of placement, and movement of the transducer affect how
fast the least significant digit of the thickness value changes. In general, you should use a
measurement rate and technique that yields fast response to transducer placement and
movement without encountering distracting jitter of the least significant digit.
The current display update rate is near the bottom left in the thickness measurement box.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

SP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Measurement
Update Rate 4Hz

Figure 25

Displaying the Measurement Update Rate

To change the measurement rate, follow these steps:


1. Press [2nd F], [4] (MEAS RATE).
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the desired rate. The available setting are:
4Hz

16Hz Averaging

8Hz

16Hz Averaging QBAR

12Hz

20Hz Averaging

16Hz

20Hz Averaging QBAR20Hz

For any barrier layer measurement mode or Multi Measurement mode using Barrier
Layer MeasType:
0.5 Hz

1 Hz Averaging

1 Hz

1 Hz Averaging with QBAR

2 Hz

2 Hz Averaging

0.5 Hz Averaging

2 Hz Averaging with QBAR

0.5 Hz Averaging with QBar


For Multi Measurement without Barrier Layer MeasType:
0.5 Hz

0.5 Hz Averaging with QBAR

1 Hz

1 Hz Averaging

2 Hz

1 Hz Averaging with QBAR

4 Hz Averaging

2 Hz Averaging

0.5 Hz Averaging

2 Hz Averaging with QBAR

3. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measure mode using the new measure rate.

SQ

j~~=p~=d~=c=~=pm=j

Note:

When you select high resolution measurements (.0001" or .001mm), the


Measure Rate is temporarily forced into Averaging - No QBAR. When
you change the resolution to standard or low, the Measure Rate is restored to
its previous value.
When you select Min or Max Measure, the Measure Rate is temporarily
forced to 20/sec. When you exit the Min or Max mode, the Measure Rate
is restored to its previous value.

4.1.3

Using the Minimum Thickness Mode


The Minimum mode displays the smallest thickness measured since the Minimum mode
was selected or since it was reset. The Minimum mode is useful when it is important to
determine the thinnest reading obtained while making a series of readings on a test piece.
The fastest display update rate is automatically activated when entering the Minimum
mode. When leaving the Minimum mode, the display update rate is restored to its
previous state.
Note:

In multi-measurement mode the min feature will hold the min for the active
reading (the one on display in large numbers).

The current thickness is displayed in the main thickness display and the minimum is
displayed in the Min thickness area.

MIN Display

MIN Display
Active
Reading

Figure 26

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Recalled MIN
During LOS

Displaying the Minimum Thickness

SR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Note:

In some situations, you can capture a false minimum reading when the
transducer is lifted from the test piece. This is possible when using excess
couplant, particularly on smooth surfaces, causing the gage to read the
thickness of a couplant drop as the transducer is lifted. To avoid this
problem, use the Freeze function in conjunction with the Minimum
Thickness mode to freeze the waveform prior to uncoupling the transducer.
Once the transducer is uncoupled and free of couplant, press [FREEZE]
again to unfreeze the display and recall the minimum thickness and
waveform.

To select a Min Measure mode from the Measure, Differential Measure, or Alarm
Measure mode, follow these steps:
1. Press [2ndF], [5] (MIN/MAX). The MIN thickness displays only when the gage is in
a Min Measure mode.
2. Press [MEAS] to reset the held minimum value so that the minimum for a new series
of measurements can be found.
The thickness display will blank indicating that the old minimum value is reset.
Saving or sending a minimum reading also resets the minimum value.
3. Press [2ndF], [5] (MIN/MAX) twice to exit from a Min Measure mode and return to
the Measure, Differential Measure, or Alarm Measure mode.
Note:

4.1.4

The [2nd F], [5] (MIN/MAX) cycles from Measure, to Min Measure, to Max
Measure, and back to Measure, etc.

Using the Maximum Thickness Mode


The Maximum mode displays the greatest thickness measured since the Maximum mode
was selected or since it was reset. The Maximum mode is useful when it is important to
determine the Maximum thickness reading obtained while making a series of readings on
a test piece. The fastest display update rate is automatically selected when entering the
Maximum mode. When leaving the Maximum mode the display update rate is restored
to its previous state.
Note:

In multi-measurement mode the min feature will hold min for the active
reading (the one displayed in large numbers).

The current thickness is displayed in the main thickness display and the maximum
thickness is displayed in the Max thickness area. The Maximum thickness replaces the
main thickness display when the transducer is uncoupled or a (LOS) Loss of Signal
occurs.

SS

j~~=p~=d~=c=~=pm=j

MAX Display

Active
Thickness

MAX Display

Recalled
MAX

Figure 27

Displaying the Maximum Thickness

Note:

In some situations, you can capture a false minimum reading when the
transducer is lifted from the test piece. This is possible when using excess
couplant, particularly on smooth surfaces, causing the gage to read the
thickness of a couplant drop as the transducer is lifted. To avoid this
problem, use the Freeze function in conjunction with the Minimum
Thickness mode to freeze the waveform prior to uncoupling the transducer.
Once the transducer is uncoupled and free of couplant, press [FREEZE]
again to unfreeze the display and recall the minimum thickness and
waveform.

To select a Maximum Measure mode from the Measure, Differential Measure, or


Alarm Measure mode, follow these steps:
1. Press [2ndF], [5] (MIN/MAX) twice. The Max thickness display shows when the
gage is in a Max Measure mode and the thickness display shows the actual measured
thickness.
2. Press [MEAS] to reset the held Maximum value so that the Maximum for a new series
of measurements can be found.
The thickness display will blank indicating that the old Maximum value is reset.
Saving or sending a Maximum reading also resets the Maximum value.
3. Press [2ndF], [5] (MIN/MAX) to exit from a Max Measure mode and return to the
Measure, Differential Measure, or Alarm Measure mode.
Note:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

The [2nd F], [5] (MIN/MAX) cycles from Measure, to Min Measure, to Max
Measure, and back to Measure, etc.

ST

j=ORjriqf=mirp

4.1.5

Managing High/Low Alarms


The Model 25MULTI PLUS has two different alarm modes: Standard Alarm and
Previous Thickness Alarm. These alarms are audible beeps that warn you when
measurements are below or above the alarm set points.
Note:

4.1.5.1

When multi-measurement is turned on the alarm will reference the active


measurement (the one displayed in large characters).

Activating the Standard Alarm


The Standard Alarm feature lets you view and change the Low Alarm Reference Value,
High Alarm Reference Value, and to turn the visual and audible alarm functions ON/OFF.
The Alarm Reference Values are thickness set points that have the current gage units and
resolution. When an Alarm Measure mode is selected, the alarm condition occurs when
any displayed reading (either actual, minimum, or maximum) is either less than the Low
Alarm Reference Value or greater than the High Alarm Reference Value.
The alarm condition is indicated by a flashing alarm flag located in the Thickness display
area and a repeated audible beep as shown in the figure below:

Low Alarm
Indicator

Figure 28

SU

Displaying the Low Alarm Indicator

j~~=p~=d~=c=~=pm=j

High Alarm
Indicator

Figure 29

Displaying the High Alarm Indicator

The alarm condition is recorded in the Datalogger second status box for all stored
measurements. An A indicates the Alarm mode, an L indicates a low alarm condition, and
an H indicates a high alarm condition. The [MEAS] key resets the alarm condition.
To activate, view, set, or change the High/Low Alarms, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [8] (ALARM) while in the Measure mode.

Figure 30

Selecting an Alarm Setting

2. Press [ ], [ ] or [ENTER] to highlight a setting to be changed (ENABLE, MODE, or


REF VALUES).
3. Press [

], [

] or [0]-[9] to change the highlighted setting.

4. Repeat from Step 1 to change another setting.


5. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measure mode with the displayed Alarm settings, or
press [2nd F], [MEAS] at any time to return to the Measure mode with the original
Alarm settings unchanged.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

SV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Note:

4.1.5.2

Use the Alarm in conjunction with the Minimum/Maximum mode. Alarm


reference values which were entered in one unit system are displayed as the
equivalent value when the alternate units are selected.

Activating the Previous Thickness Alarm


Alarm on Previous thickness gives both an audio and visual alarm if the current thickness
value is outside the alarm set points when compared to the previous thickness value. In
order to use this function, the previously stored file for an inspection must be sent to or
already exist on the Model 25MULTI PLUS. The alarm uses the previous thickness value
as its reference when determining if the current thickness is a high or low alarm condition.
The Alarm condition is indicated by a flashing alarm flag located in the thickness display
area and repeated audio beeps. The Alarm condition is recorded in the datalogger second
status box for all stored measurements. An a indicates the Alarm mode, an l indicates a
low alarm, and an h indicates a high alarm condition. The [MEAS] key resets the Alarm
condition.

Figure 31

Displaying the Previous Thickness Alarm

The Absolute Differential Alarm lets you set a Thickness Loss Alarm Value and a
Thickness Growth Alarm Value. These values are used to compare the current live
thickness value to the previously stored thickness value at each ID# location within a file.
If the current thickness value, when compared to the previous value, is outside the set
limits an alarm is indicated. If the thickness differential is greater than or equal to the
Thickness Loss Value a Low Alarm is indicated. If the thickness differential is greater
than the Thickness Growth Value a High Alarm is indicated.
Example:
Thickness Loss Value: 0.050"
Thickness Growth Value: 0.005"

TM

j~~=p~=d~=c=~=pm=j

Previous
Values

Current
Thickness

Low
Alarm

High
Alarm

Calculations

0.300"

0.239"

Yes

No

0.300-0.239 > 0.050"

0.300"

0.316"

No

Yes

0.316-0.300 > 0.005"

0.300"

0.285"

No

No

0.300-0.285 < 0.050"

0.300"

0.302"

No

No

0.302-0.300 < 0.005"

Table 4

Calculating a Low/High Alarm

The Percent Differential Alarm lets you set a Percent Thickness Loss Alarm Value and a
Percent Thickness Growth Alarm Value. These values are used to compare the current
thickness value to the previous thickness value at each ID# location in a file. If the current
thickness value is outside the set percent limits, when compared to the previous thickness
value, an alarm is indicated. If the percent thickness differential is greater than or equal to
the Percent Loss Value a Low Alarm is indicated. If the percent thickness differential is
greater than the Percent Growth Value a High Alarm is indicated.
Example:
Percent Loss Value: 20%
Percent Growth Value: 5%

Previous
Values

Current
Thickness

Low
Alarm

High
Alarm

0.300"

0.239"

Yes

No

0.300 0.239
--------------------------------- 100 > 20%
0.300

0.300"

0.316"

No

Yes

0.300 0.239
--------------------------------- 100 > 5%
0.300

0.300"

0.285"

No

No

0.300 0.285------------------------------- 100 < 20%


0.300

0.300"

0.302"

No

No

0.302 0.300
--------------------------------- 100 < 5%
0.300

Table 5

Calculations

Calculating a Percent Thickness Alarm Value

To activate, view, or change the percent thickness value, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [8] (Alarm) while in the Measure mode.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

TN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Figure 32

Entering Loss/Growth Values

2. Press [ ], [ ], or [ENTER] to highlight the Enable option.


3. Press [ ] or [ ] to turn the alarm on or off. If turning alarm off, then press [MEAS];
if not press [ENTER].
Mode should now be highlighted.
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select either Standard Alarm or Previous Thickness Alarm.
For example, select PREV THK, and then press [ENTER].
DISPLAYED should now be highlighted.
5. Press [ ] or [ ] to select ABS DIFF (Absolute Differential) or % DIFF (Percent
Differential). Press [ENTER].
6. Enter Value for THK-LOSS (Thickness Loss Value) or % LOSS (Percent Loss
Value) using the numeric keys. Press [ENTER].
7. Enter THK-GROWTH (Thickness Growth Value) or % GROWTH (Percent
Growth Value). Press [MEAS].
Now the gage is in the Previous Thickness Alarm mode. When a reading triggers the
alarm the gage responds with a visual alarm condition and an audible beep. Alarm
conditions are stored in the datalogger with the stored data point.

4.1.6

Changing the Thickness Resolution


The resolution, meaning the number of thickness value digits shown to the right of the
decimal point, can be changed from the keyboard. This option is useful in some
applications where the extra precision of the last digit is not required, or where extremely
rough outside or inside surfaces make the last thickness display digit unreliable. The
resolutions are selectable:

TO

Standard (factory default): .001" or .01mm

Low: .01" or .1mm

High: .0001" or .001mm

j~~=p~=d~=c=~=pm=j

The resolution selection affects all displays and data output of values with thickness units.
This includes measured thickness, differential reference value, and alarm set points.
Note:

The velocity is always reported with full five digit resolution.

To change the resolution while in the Measure mode, press [2ndF], [2] (RESOL). The
new resolution is indicated by the position of the decimal point.

4.1.7

Using the Thickness Display Hold/Blank


While LOS (Loss of Signal) occurs, the displayed thickness and waveforms can be set
either to continue to show the last measured thickness (Hold mode), or to turn off
completely (Blank mode), depending if the Hold or the Blank display mode is selected.
The Blank display mode is the default mode.
To change to the alternate thickness display mode from the Measure mode, press [2ndF],
[7] (HOLD/BLK). The display shows an message indicating the current Hold/Blank
display condition.

4.1.8

Managing the Calibration Lock


The Calibration Lock feature lets you set the gage so that no calibration values (meaning,
no parameters that can affect the value of the measurement) can be altered. These include
Velocity and Test block Zero. However, when the Calibration Lock condition is active,
you can still view these values, change Measurement modes, and use the Datalogger
functions.
To activate the Calibration Lock, do the following:
Press [6] and [3] together while in a Measure mode.
A lock message appears briefly to indicate that the Calibration Lock is active.
If you press a locked key while the gage is in the Calibration Lock condition, a lock
message opens.
To deactivate the Calibration Lock, do the following:
While in the Measure mode press [6] and [3] together again.
A beep indicates that the Calibration Lock is being disabled and the gage briefly
displays the message CAL LOCK is off.

4.1.9

Freezing the Waveform


Pressing the [FREEZE] key stops the updating of the displayed waveform image and
keep the waveform and thickness on the display even after the transducer is moved or
removed. Frozen waveforms are indicated by a large F in the upper waveform status box.
To return the display to an active mode press [FREEZE] again. The [MEAS] key also
returns the display to active mode. The [SAVE] key saves the data and returns the display
to active.
To Freeze the waveform and thickness display, follow these steps:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

TP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

1. Press [FREEZE] while making a measurement. A large F in the upper waveform


status box indicates a frozen waveform.
2. Press [FREEZE] again to unfreeze the waveform and thickness display.
Tip:

4.1.10

The [MEAS] key and [SAVE] key also unfreeze the display.

Changing Rectification Modes


The Rectification mode is the way in which the ultrasonic echoes are represented on the
waveform display. The Rectification mode does not affect the thickness measurement in
any way.
The default Rectification mode is called RF Waveform. Both positive and negative lobes
are displayed in the RF Waveform, which gives the best overall representation of position
and magnitude for most gaging applications. The display indicates the rectification type
by an indicator RF located at the bottom right hand side of the waveform.
Other Rectification modes that are available are as follows:

Half Wave Negative: Shows negative echo lobes as positive and does not show the
positive lobes at all. An indicator, NEG, located at the bottom right of the waveform,
indicates half wave negative.

Half Wave Positive: Shows positive lobes but not negative lobes. An indicator, POS,
located at the bottom right of the waveform, indicates half wave positive.

Full Wave: Shows the negative portion of the echo folded around the baseline so that
both positive and negative lobes are displayed.

To Change Rectification Modes, follow these steps:


1. Press [2nd F], [FREEZE] (RECT).
The Rectification mode changes to the next mode in the cycle: RF Full Wave - Half
Wave Negative - Half Wave Positive - and back to RF - etc.
2. Press [2nd F], [FREEZE] (RECT) again if necessary to select the desired mode.

4.1.11

Selecting Metric Units


The [IN/MM] button lets you toggle between inches and millimeters. For example, if the
gage is set to millimeters and you press [IN/MM], then the gage converts all
measurements to inches. To reverse the conversion, simply press [IN/MM] again.

4.2

Operating SP Modes
The SP mode contains several adjustable parameters. To access the SP mode, press [2nd
F], [0] on the keypad. Toggle to any of the options available such as Measurement,
Communication, Diagnostics, Resets, or Clock, and press [ENTER].

TQ

j~~=p~=d~=c=~=pm=j

Figure 33

4.2.1

Selecting an SP Mode

Managing the Measurement Setup Mode


The Measurement Setup mode is the most commonly used SP mode. The Measurement
Setup mode lets you access a setup menu that controls global settings concerning the gage
measurement features. You can change any of the parameters from the available options
in the Measurement Setup mode:

4.2.1.1

Beeper

Inactive Time

Language

Radix

Waveform

Backlight Mode

Supervisor Lock

Save Key

ID Overwrite Protection

Quick Setup

Managing the Beeper Tone


The Beeper Tone is used to signify when a key is pressed and also provide an audio signal
during alarm condition.
To enable or disable the Beeper function, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP MODE).
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Measurement Setup. Press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Beeper.
4. Use the [

] or [

] keys to select between Off (Beeper off) and On (Beeper on).

5. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measurement mode.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

TR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

4.2.1.2

Managing Inactive Time


Normally the gage powers off automatically after about six minutes if no key is pressed
and no measurement is made within that time. This is to prevent the battery from running
down if the gage is left unattended for a long period of time without being powered off.
The Auto Shut Off is selectable so you can choose between no auto power off and six
minute auto power off.
To enable or disable the Inactive Time function, follow these, steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP MODE).
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Measurement Setup. Press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Inactive Time.
4. Press [

] or [

] to select between off/on.

When Inactive Time is On, the unit powers off after 6 minutes of inactivity. When
Inactive Time is Off, the unit does not shut off until manually turned off using the
[ON/OFF] key.
5. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measurement mode.

4.2.1.3

Managing Language Settings


The Model 25MULTI PLUS can currently be operated in English. German, French and
Spanish will be added in the future. Contact Panametrics-NDTTM for further details.

4.2.1.4

Managing the Radix Point


The Model 25MULTI PLUS can display and store the thickness data with either a period
or a comma as the Radix Point.
To Set the Radix Point, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [0]. The SP Mode Menu opens.

Figure 34

Selecting the Measurement Option from the SP Mode Menu

2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Measurement. Press [ENTER] and the following


screen opens:

TS

j~~=p~=d~=c=~=pm=j

Figure 35

Selecting the Radix Point

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Radix.


4. Press [

] and [

] to change the setting to Period or Comma.

5. Press [MEAS] to exit.

4.2.1.5

Managing the Waveform Filled or Unfilled Trace


The Model 25MULTI PLUS can display the waveform trace as Filled or Unfilled.
Note:

A filled waveform trace is only possible when the waveform rectification is


set to full, halfwave negative or halfwave positive.

Unfilled Waveform
Figure 36

Filled Waveform

Displaying a Waveform Trace

To set the waveform trace parameter as Filled or Unfilled, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [0].

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

TT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Measurement. Press [ENTER] and the following


screen opens:

Figure 37

Selecting a Waveform Trace Option

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Waveform.


4. Press [

] and [

] to change the setting to Fill or Unfill.

5. Press [MEAS] to exit.

4.2.1.6

Managing the Backlight


The display Backlight feature internally illuminates the liquid crystal display. This feature
lets you view the display, which has excellent visibility in normal to high ambient light
conditions, in low to zero ambient light conditions. The Model 25MULTI PLUS has two
Backlight modes; Normal and Auto. The Backlight mode is accessible through the
measurement setup by pressing [2nd F], [0].
To turn the Backlight on, follow these steps:
1. Press the key with the light bulb symbol.
2. Press the light bulb key again to turn the Backlight off.
If the gage is in the Normal mode, the Backlight remains on until it is manually turned
off. If the gage is in the Auto mode, the Backlight turns on when the Model 25MULTI
PLUS is actively making measurements, and turn off 5 seconds after an (LOS) Loss of
Signal occurs. The Backlight key operates in every gage mode including the keyboard
lock.
Note:

TU

Use the Backlight only when necessary. Both the battery operating time and
the long term brightness of the Backlight are substantially decreased when
the Backlight is used continuously.

j~~=p~=d~=c=~=pm=j

4.2.1.7

Managing the Supervisor Lock


The Supervisory Lock feature allows the gage to be locked from a higher level than the
Calibration Lock located on the front of the keyboard. (See Managing the Calibration
Lock on page 73). When this lock is enabled, no calibration values can be altered
(meaning, no parameters that can affect the value of the measurement.) The locked values
are:

Velocity

Test Block Zero

Differential Reference Value

Alarm Set

Transducer Adjustment Parameters

To enable the Supervisory Lock, follow these steps:


1. Press [2nd F], [0].
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Measurement. Press [ENTER] and the following
screen opens:

Figure 38

Activating the Supervisor Lock

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Supv Lock.


4. Press [

] and [

] to select On or Off.

5. Press [MEAS] to exit.

4.3

Saving Key Selection


Either the displayed thickness value or both the thickness and waveform can be stored in
the Datalogger using the [SAVE] key. All of the appropriate calibration and setup
parameters are also stored simultaneously. See Saving Data on page 143 for more
information.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

TV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

4.3.1

Operating the ID Overwrite Protection


ID Overwrite Protection is a function prompts you with a warning message every time you
attempt to overwrite an existing measurement in the datalogger. You can activate this
function at any time. Once activated, a message prompt displays when an attempt is made
to save over an existing thickness reading/waveform. You can choose to Save Over
(replace the existing stored measurement) or Cancel (leave the existing measurement in
place.)
To turn on ID Overwrite Protection, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [0].
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Measurement. Press [ENTER] and the following
screen opens:

Figure 39

Activating ID Overwrite Protection

3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight ID Overwrite.


4. Press [

] and [

] to turn ID Overwrite Protection On or Off.

When ID Overwrite Protection is On, the following screen opens when you attempt to
save over an existing measurement.

Figure 40

UM

Saving Measurements with Overwrite Protection activated

j~~=p~=d~=c=~=pm=j

5. Press [

] and [

] to select Save or Cancel. Press [ENTER].

Selecting Save replaces the previous reading in the datalogger with the new reading.
Selecting Cancel keeps the previous reading stored in the datalogger.
Note:

4.3.1.1

The thickness reading and waveform is held on the display while you make
this selection.

Activating Quick Setup


Normally, Custom Application Setups are changed by selecting the Application Setup
List using [2nd F], [CAL] (SETUP), slewing down to the desired Setup Name, and
pressing [MEAS]. This is adequate for the usual case in which setups are changed
infrequently. However, when it is necessary to change frequently between two or more
custom setups, a more direct short-cut procedure is available.
When this procedure (called Quick Setup) is enabled, a single keystroke (held for a
moment to prevent errors) quickly switches to any of the first nine custom setups.
To enable the Quick Setup feature, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP Mode). A list of special modes opens.
2. Press [

], [

3. Press [

] or [

4. Press [

], or [ENTER] to select Measurement. A list of items opens.


] to select Quick Setup.

], [MEAS] to activate Quick Setup and return to the Measure mode.

To change the active application setup to any of the first nine custom setups when Quick
Setup is enabled, do the following:
Press and hold any numeric key, [1] through [9], until the beep sounds (about 1.5
seconds). The momentary message USER N is now active and appears on the second
status line, and the active setup is changed to the displayed name.
Note:

USER-N refers to the Nth custom setup where N is the numeric key pressed.

You can use numeric keys repeatedly in this method to quickly move between setups.
When preceded by the [2nd F] key, numeric keys always perform the indicated second
function, e.g. [2nd F], [5] selects MIN or MAX Measure mode even when Quick Setup
is activated. Quick Setup remains enabled until disabled by following the procedure
described above.

4.3.2

Managing the Communication Mode


The Communication menu allows the gage and a computer to transfer data. In order for
this communication process to be successful, the parameters in the gage must match those
in the computer.
To change the communication parameters, follow these steps:
1. Verify the computers parameters for the baud rate, stop bits, and parity.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

UN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

2. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP MODE). The following menu opens:

Figure 41

Selecting the Communications Mode

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Communication option. Press [ENTER]. The


following menu opens:

Figure 42

Changing the Communication Parameters

The current communication parameters appear. The settings available for each
parameter is as follows:
Baud Rate: (1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200)
Number of Stop Bits: (1 or 2)
Parity Bit: (None, Odd, or Even)
Comm Protocol: (Single or Multiple)
Output Format: (F1 to F10) (See Appendix E - Remote Control Via RS-232 on
page 223.)
4. Press [ ] or [ ] to change any of the parameters until the desired parameter is
highlighted.
5. Press [

] or [

] to change the parameter setting.

6. Exit this mode by highlighting the Previous Screen option and pressing [ENTER].
Tip:

UO

You can also exit this mode by pressing the [MEAS] key.

j~~=p~=d~=c=~=pm=j

4.3.2.1

Using the Continuous Output Option


The Continuous Output option allows you to enable a special output mode, where the gage
sends the current thickness reading at the display measurement update rate. Use this
feature to send the current thickness reading to a computer or other device to continuously
monitor thickness changes. This feature is helpful if the Model 25MULTI PLUS is being
integrated into an online thickness monitoring application. The output rate can be set to 4,
8, 12, 16 and 20 outputs/sec. and is set using the Meas Rate Key. (See Using the
Measurement Display Update Rate on page 63.)
To activate the Continuous Output option do the following:
1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP Mode).
2. Press [

], [

], or [ENTER] to select Communication.

3. Highlight Continuous Output. Press [ ] or [ ] to turn the function On or Off.


(See Using the Continuous Output Option on page 83.)
Note:

Only turn Continuous Output On to continuously send the active display


thickness through the RS-232 cable. It is important to turn Off this feature
when Communicating with the WIN25DL PLUS interface program or when
trying to upgrade the Model 25MULTI PLUS operating software.

The output format for the Continuous Output data consists of the current live displayed
thickness value and a Carriage Return <CR> then Line Feed <LF>. If the gage is in LOS
(loss of signal) then --.--- is sent indicating that the Measurement screen is blank. The
number of dashes after the decimal point is equal the current measurement resolution of
the thickness display. An example of the continuous output format is listed below:
0.192<CR>,< LF>
0.192<CR>,< LF>
0.191<CR>,< LF>
0.192<CR>,< LF>
0.191<CR>,< LF>
0.191<CR>,< LF>
0.191<CR>,< LF>
0.191<CR>,< LF>
--.---<CR>,< LF>
--.---<CR>,< LF>
0.191<CR>,< LF>
--.---<CR>,< LF>
Continuous output for multi-measurement will send all the multiple measurement on a
single line separated by a comma and then a <carriage return> and <line feed>.
Example:
0.192, 0.005, 0.154, 0.351 <CR>, <LF>

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

UP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

0.193, 0.006, 0.155, 0.355 <CR>, <LF>


-- ---, 0.006, 0.154, --.--- <CR>, <LF>
Note:

4.3.2.2

In multiple measurement continuous output the number of thickness


readings per line can be 2, 3 or 4.

Performing DBase Tracking


Use DBASE tracking when you want to duplicate a thickness inspection where the alarm
set points values may be changing from one ID# to the next. The DBASE Tracking mode
automatically sets the Alarm Value to that which was used at the previous inspection. To
use this function you must download a file to the Model 25MULTI PLUS where the Alarm
is manually set for the different ID# locations or copy an existing file that has alarm
settings. The measurement Alarms Settings values can automatically track to the values
stored at each ID number in the survey file. You can use the displayed ID numbers to guide
you through the same series of measurements that were collected in the original survey
file. Also, you can compare the current measurements with the previous thickness values
displayed under the ID number at the top of the display.
If the downloaded or copied file do not have any Alarm set point values in the stored data
file at the current ID number, then the setups remain unchanged from the previous ID#.
Even if DBASE tracking is activate, you can override the alarm settings for the current ID
number by manually changing the alarm values or by deactivating the DBASE Tracking
functions.
Note:

In multi-measurement mode the active reading (displayed large) will be


compared to the previous alarm set point.

To activate and deactivate DBASE Tracking , follow these steps:


1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP Mode).

4.3.3

2. Press [

], [

], or [ENTER] to select Communication.

3. Press [

], [

] to highlight the DBASE Tracking option.

4. Press [

]or [

] to turn the function On or Off.

Managing the Gage Diagnostics Mode


The gage contains several Diagnostic Self Tests to help aid in localizing a suspected
hardware problem or to verify correct hardware operation. These tests can be performed
from the keypad. To go to the Diagnostics menu, press [2nd F] [0] (SP MODE). Use the
[ ] key to highlight Diagnostics, and press [ENTER]. A menu opens with the following
options.

UQ

Keypad

Video

Hardware Status

j~~=p~=d~=c=~=pm=j

4.3.3.1

Hardware Control

Error Status

Operating the Keypad Test


To operate the Keypad Test, follow these steps:
1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Keypad.
2. Press [ENTER]. This displays a replica of the keypad on the display.
3. Test any key by pressing it on the keypad. If that specific key is working correctly, the
gage beeps and that key is highlighted on the display.
Note:

4.3.3.2

The [ON/OFF] key powers off the gage, and the [ENTER] key exits the
Keypad Test mode.

Operating the Video Display Test


To operate the Video Display Test, follow these steps:
1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Video.
2. Press [ENTER]. This test displays a darkened rectangle, which decreases in size. If at
any time a break appears in the pattern, then there is a problem with the waveform
display. Otherwise, it is operating correctly.

4.3.3.3

Assessing the Hardware Status


To assess the Hardware status, follow these steps:
1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Hardware Status.
2. Press [ENTER]. The gage displays many hardware calibration parameters and status.
If the gage is functioning correctly, all parameters should display Passed.

4.3.3.4

Operating the Hardware Control


Note:

Hardware Control is used by Panametrics-NDTTM repair technicians and,


normally, should not be used.

To operate the Hardware Control, follow these steps:


1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select Hardware Control.
2. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measure mode.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

UR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

4.3.3.5

Assessing Error Status


The Error Status is a log of any error condition that may have occurred during gage
operation. Pressing [MEAS] clears the error log and returns to the Measure mode.

4.3.4

Operating Gage Resets


The Model 25MULTI PLUS has four different resets designed to quickly restore the gage
to the default setup parameters.

Measurement Reset

Communication Reset

DBase Reset

Master Reset

Resets are useful whether you are new or experienced at operating the gage. These resets
provide an efficient short-cut to a known configuration.

4.3.4.1

Performing a Measurement Reset


The Measurement Reset changes the measurement parameters to the factory default
values. The default measurement parameters are listed below.

Measurement

Default Parameter

Measure mode with


Differential

Fast, Min, Max, and Alarms turned off

Material Velocity

0.22460 in/sec or 05.7048mm/sec the approximate


velocity of the included test blocks

Differential Reference Value

0.0 in or mm

Low Alarm Reference Value

0.0 in or mm

High Alarm Reference Value

20.0 in or 500.0mm

Cal keys

Unlocked

Display Update Rate

4 per second

Zoom

Off

Range

Minimum range

Blank thickness display when LOS


Standard resolution, i.e. 0.001 in or 0.01mm
Table 6

Measurement Reset Default Settings

To perform the Measurement Reset, follow these steps:

US

j~~=p~=d~=c=~=pm=j

1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP MODE).


2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Resets option. Press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Measurement Reset. Press [ENTER].
The gage prompts you to press the [ENTER] key to confirm the reset, or the [MEAS]
key to escape and cancel Measurement Reset.
4. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measurement mode.

4.3.4.2

Performing a Communication Reset


The Communication Reset resets the Communication parameters to the factory default
values. The default communication parameters are listed below.
Baud rate:

19200

Stop Bits:

Parity:

None

Comm Protocol: Multiple


Output Format: F1
To perform the Communication Reset, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP MODE).
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Resets option. Press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Communication Reset. Press [ENTER].
The gage prompts you to press either [ENTER] to confirm the reset or [MEAS] to
terminate Communications Reset.
4. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measurement mode.

4.3.4.3

Performing a DBase Reset


The Dbase Reset deletes all stored data in the datalogger.
Caution: The Dbase Reset permanently deletes all stored thickness reading/waveforms
that are stored in the Model 25MULTI PLUS. However, this reset does not delete any
stored transducer setups.
To perform the Dbase Reset, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SETUP).
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Resets option. Press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Dbase Reset. Press [ENTER].
The gage prompts you to press either [ENTER] to confirm the reset or [MEAS] to
terminate the Dbase Reset.
4. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measurement mode.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

UT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

4.3.4.4

Performing a Master Reset


The Master Reset performs all of the Model 25MULTI PLUSs resets. The Measurement
parameters and Communication parameters are reset to their default values and the Dbase
is also be reset.
Caution: The Master Reset permanently deletes all stored thickness reading/waveforms
that are stored in the Model 25MULTI PLUS.
To perform the Master Reset, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP MODE).
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Resets option. Press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight Master Reset. Press [ENTER].
The gage prompts you to press either [ENTER] to confirm the reset or [MEAS] to
escape and cancel Master Reset
4. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measurement mode.

4.3.5

Using the Clock


The Model 25MULTI PLUS has a built in clock for time and date. You can set the clock
to specific time zones in either a 12 or 24 hour mode. You can also set the date in Standard
U.S. format (Month/Day) or International format (Day/Month). The following list
includes the parameters that are available:

Mode (12 hour/24 hour)

Hour

Minutes

AM/PM

Mode (US/International)

Month

Day

Year

To set the clock, follow these steps:


1. Press [2nd F], [0].
2. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Clock option, and press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ], [ ], [
settings.

], [

], and [ENTER] keys to set the parameters to the desired

4. Highlight Set and press [ENTER] to exit.


Highlight Cancel and press [ENTER] to terminate the new settings.

UU

r=`=p

Using Custom Setups


In addition to providing programmed standard transducer setups, the Model 25MULTI
PLUS permits you to create custom setups by changing a series of pulser/receiver and
gating parameters. Use custom setups when the measurement requirements of a particular
application are not optimally met by one of the standard setups. In some cases, a Model
25MULTI PLUS ships from the factory pre-programmed with one or more custom setups
to meet special customer requirements. However, you may want to create your own
custom setups. Once adjustments are made, you can name and store these setup
parameters in one of the 35 user defined setup locations. This feature gives the Model
25MULTI PLUS the flexibility to change quickly between transducer and application
setups by selecting the setup name from a stored list or using the Quick setup recall
feature.
Note:

The adjustments described in this section should be made only by a qualified


technician who is familiar with the basic theory of ultrasonic gaging and the
interpretation of ultrasonic waveforms.

Many of these adjustments are interactive, and all of them have an effect on the
measurement range and/or measurement accuracy of the Model 25MULTI PLUS. In most
cases, do not attempt adjustments without monitoring waveforms. Additionally, when
establishing a custom setup for a specific application, it is essential to verify performance
on reference standards representing the material(s) and thickness range to measure.
Topics are as follows:

5.1

Managing the Detect Mode Function

MeasType

Defining a Setup Name

Defining a Probe Type

Varying Pulser Power Effects

Defining Maximum Gain

Defining Initial Gain

Defining TDG Slope

Viewing the Main Bang Blank

Viewing the Echo Window

Managing the Detect Mode Function


The Detect Mode function selects Mode 1, Mode 2, or Mode 3 measurements. See
DtectMode and EchWindow Parameters on page 96 for further explanation.
Mode 1 (standard): Measures the time of flight between the Main Bang and the first
backwall echo using a direct contact transducer.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

UV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Main Bang
First Backwall

Figure 43

Detect Mode 1

Mode 2 (standard): Measures the time of flight between the interface (or delay line) echo
and the first backwall echo using a delay line or immersion transducer.

Main Bang

First Backwall

Interface

Figure 44

Detect Mode 2

Mode 3 (standard): Measures the time of flight between one backwall echo to the next
backwall echo using a delay line or immersion transducer.

VM

r=`=p

Interface
First Backwall
First
Backwall

Figure 45

5.2

Detect Mode 3

MeasType
The 25MULTI PLUS can make two types of measurements, Standard Echo Timing
measurements or Barrier Layer.
Standard Echo Timing Measurements: Created by taking a time of flight
measurement between two successive echoes (See Managing the Detect Mode
Function on page 89.)
Barrier Layer measurements: Special measurement technique using advanced
algorithms to separate and measure the time between echoes from both sides of a thin
barrier layer material used in multi-layer plastic containers. This measurement type
should only be used to measure barrier layer thickness in the range of 0.004 -0.020 in.
(0.100-.500 mm) depending on material sound velocity. If the barrier layer thickness
is greater then 0.020 in. (0.500 mm) there should be enough echo separation so that a
standard thickness measurement can be used.

5.3

Defining a Setup Name


A user defined name has up to 16 alphanumeric characters used to name and describe the
stored setup.

5.4

Defining a Probe Type


The probe type indicates the transducer type selected in the Active Setup. Each probe type
selected should match the frequency of the transducer being used for proper Pulser/
Receiver performance.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

VN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

5.5

Varying Pulser Power Effects


You can adjust the excitation pulse (Main Bang) voltage in three steps of 30, 60, and 110
Volts. Higher voltages may provide greater penetration at the expense of near surface
resolution, especially in Mode 1, while lower voltages may provide better near surface
resolution at the expense of penetration. For most applications the 110 Volt setting
provides the best signal-to-noise ratio for returning echoes. The Pulser Power does the
following:

Indicates the voltage used to drive the transducer that is selected

Affects the amount of energy going into the transducer and the size of the Initial Pulse

Initial Pulse

Figure 46

Pulser Power set to 30 Volts shows a smaller initial pulse

Initial Pulse

Figure 47

5.6

Pulser Power set to 110 Volts shows a larger initial pulse

Defining Maximum Gain


You can adjust the maximum available receiver gain from 0.0dB to 79.6dB. The Model
25MULTI PLUS uses Automatic Gain Control (AGC) and Time Dependent Gain (TDG)
functions to automatically adjust receiver gain to an optimum level when an echo is

VO

r=`=p

detected. When no echo is detected (LOS prompt), the gain rises to the maximum level set
by the Initial Gain, Slope, and Maximum Gain. If the maximum gain is set too high, the
gage may hang up on transducer noise or other spurious signals; if it is set too low,
returning echoes may not be high enough for detection.
In general, for a given application the Max Gain should be set high enough that all echoes
of interest are detected, but a steady LOS prompt is displayed when the transducer is not
coupled to a test piece. The Max Gain indicates the Maximum (Time dependent) receiver
gain possible and is used to amplify echoes that are further out in time.
Note:

The Max Gain can never be lower then initial Gain and has a maximum value
of 80.0dB.

TDG SLOPE

Max Gain

Initial

Time

Figure 48

5.7

Maximum Gain

Defining Initial Gain


Initial Gain and TDG Slope are part of a Time Dependent Gain system that may be used to
optimize near-surface resolution while providing a higher maximum gain for thicker
samples. You can adjust the Initial Gain from 0dB to the maximum defined by the Max
Gain setting. This parameter sets an upper limit on receiver gain in the vicinity of the
excitation pulse (Mode 1) or interface echo (Modes 2 and 3). By effectively making the
excitation pulse or interface echo smaller, the TDG system permits detection of echoes
occurring close to pulse or echo in time.
The TDG system is also used in measurements of highly scattering materials, such as cast
metals and fiberglass, to minimize detection of scatter echoes occurring ahead of the
backwall. From the initial gain level, receiver gain slopes up to the maximum gain level at
the rate determined by the TDG Slope setting. The Initial Gain setting is most critical in
applications where minimum thickness measurements must be optimized, and should
always be set with the aid of a reference standard representing that minimum. In cases
where the minimum thickness capability is less important than penetration, and scatter
echoes are not a problem, Initial Gain can be set equal to Max Gain. The Initial Gain does
the following:

Indicates the initial (time dependent) receiver gain currently selected

Amplifies echoes that are close to the Main Bang or interface echoes

Starts at Time Zero and extends to:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

the Main Bang Blank in Mode 1

VP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

the end of the Interface Blank in Mode 2 and 3


TDG SLOPE

Max Gain

Initial

Time

Figure 49

5.8

Initial Gain

Defining TDG Slope


The Time Dependent Gain (TDG) Slope function controls the rate at which the receiver
gain slopes up from the Initial Gain level to the Max Gain level. You can set the Slope from
0.0 to 26.5dB per microsecond. Generally, TDG Slope should be set as high as possible to
reach maximum gain as quickly as possible without having the gage hang up on spurious
signals.

Rate of increase of the receiver (Time dependent) Gain from Initial Gain to Max Gain

Slope helps suppress reflections from grain structure or fibers

Slope adjusts from 0.0dB to 26.52 dB/Sec

Point in time that the Gain starts to slope is:

the Main Bang Blank in Mode 1

the End of the Interface Blank in Mode 2 and 3


TDG SLOPE

Max Gain

Initial

Time

Figure 50

5.9

TDG Slope

Viewing the Main Bang Blank


The Main Bang Blank is effectively a blank zone that protects the receiver from false
readings generated by the Main Bang. This blank or dead zone (up to 18 microseconds
from the excitation pulse) prevents you from detecting echoes of the trailing edge of the
excitation pulse as if it were a backwall or interface echo. The Main Bang Blank indicates
the point in time where the gage begins to search for echoes.
In Modes 2 and 3, the setting of the Main Bang Blank is not critical; set at some point
between the end of excitation pulse ringdown and the interface echo.

VQ

r=`=p

In Mode 1, however, the length of the Main Bang Blank determines the minimum
thickness that can be measured, and it must be positioned with care after selecting the
Initial Gain level. In Mode 1, set just past the Initial Pulse. If the Main Bang Blank is too
short, then the gage hangs up on the excitation pulse and readings are not be possible. If the
Main Bang Blank is too long, then the minimum measurable thickness is unnecessarily
restricted. Make sure that the Main Bang Blank is always set before the interface echo
from the shortest water path when using immersion transducers.
In general, set the Main Bang Blank just beyond the point where the gage hangs up, and
test with the transducer both coupled to and uncoupled from the test material to ensure
accurate measurements.

Main Bang Blank

Initial Pulse

Figure 51

Main Bang Blank position for Mode 1

Main Bang Blank

Initial Pulse

Figure 52

5.10

Main Bang Blank position for Mode 2 and 3

Viewing the Echo Window


The Echo Window is the time interval in each Main Bang period during which the gage is
enabled to detect Echoes. The Echo Window interval begins at the end of the Main Bang
Blank. The end of the Echo Window depends on the DtectMode and EchWindow
parameters as shown in the following table:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

VR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

DtectMode = 1

DtectMode = 2 or 3

Echo Window Starts:

At end of Main Bang


Blank

At end of Main Blank

Echo Window Ends:

EchWindow xsec
following Main Bang

EchWindow xsec
following the interface
blank

Note: xsec where you set the x parameter.


Table 7

DtectMode and EchWindow Parameters

In Mode 1, the Echo Window can usually be set to any value greater than the round-trip
pulse transit time in the thickest or slowest piece of material to be measured. The exact
setting is not critical as long as it is long enough to include the farthest echo of interest. In
Modes 2 and 3, the Echo Window is limited to the time interval between successive
interface echoes. The end of the Echo Window must be set ahead of the second interface
echo to prevent an incorrect detection, which in turn determines a maximum measurable
thickness for Mode 2 and Mode 3 setups. In applications involving Mode 2 and Mode 3
immersion measurements, the echo placement must apply throughout the range of water
paths to be used.

Main Bang Blank


Echo Window
Initial Pulse
Backwall

Figure 53

VS

Echo Window Setting for Mode 1

r=`=p

Echo Window

Interface Echo
Interface Blank

Figure 54

5.10.1

2nd Interface
Echo

Echo Window Setting for Mode 2 and 3

Echo 1 Detect and Echo 2 Detect


Echo 1 Detect and Echo 2 Detect select positive or negative polarity echo detection as
determined by application requirements. Selection is dependant on mode of
measurement and type of test material.
Note:

Positive and negative polarity refer to processed echoes displayed on the


waveform display.
Mode 1: Using contact transducers, Echo 1 is the backwall echo and Echo 2 is
not applicable. Echo 1 is normally negative, except when measuring material
of low acoustic impedance bonded to a material of high impedance (such as
plastic or rubber over metal), where the echo is phase-reversed and positive
detection for Echo 1 is appropriate.
Mode 2: Using delay line or immersion transducers, Echo 1 is the interface
echo and Echo 2 is the backwall echo. Echo 1 is normally positive for high
impedance materials such as metals and ceramics, and negative for low
impedance materials such as most plastics. Echo 2 is normally negative unless
the backwall echo represents the sort of low-to-high impedance boundary
described above.
Mode 3: Using delay line or immersion transducers, Echo 1 is the interface
echo and Echo 2 represents the backwall echoes. Since Mode 3 generally
involves measurement of high impedance materials, the general rule is to set
Echo 1 positive and Echo 2 negative. In some special cases involving difficult
geometries, phase distortion may cause the positive side of the backwall echoes
to be better defined than the negative side; in such cases set Echo 2 positive.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

VT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Figure 55

Echo 1 Detection

Figure 56

Negative Detection Steel Back by Air

Echo 1 Detect
Positive
Echo 2 Detect
Negative

Figure 57

VU

Positive Detection Plastic Bonded to Steel

r=`=p

5.10.2

Interface Blank
Use Interface Blank in Modes 2 and 3 only. Interface Blank represents a blank or dead
zone up to 20 microseconds in length that follows the leading edge of the interface echo.
In Mode 2, the Interface Blank prevents detection of trailing lobes or cycles of the
interface echo, which might otherwise be detected as backwall echoes, resulting in a hangup condition.
The Interface Blank should be set as short as possible to avoid unnecessarily restricting
minimum measurable thickness. The Initial Gain function often helps reduce interface
echo amplitude and permit use of a shorter interface blank. Check Interface Blank settings
with the transducer both coupled to and uncoupled from the test material.
In Mode 3, the Interface Blank selects which pair of backwall echoes are measured. In
most conditions, the Interface Blank would be set just short of the first backwall echo.
However, as a practical matter, the first backwall echo from thin materials is often
distorted or lost in the interface ringdown, and with some challenging geometries (such as
tight radii) later pairs of backwall echoes may be cleaner than early ones. In these cases, set
the Interface Blank to a length that insures detection of a clean and well-defined pair of
backwall echoes, even if echoes are not the first two.

Gage Reading Trailing Edge of


The Interface Echo
Figure 58

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Interface Blank Set


Correctly

Mode 2

VV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Gage Reading between


Backwall 1 and 2

Figure 59

5.10.3

Interface Blank adjusted so


Gage will measure between
Backwall 2 and 3

Mode 3

Mode 3 Echo Blank


The function of Mode 3 Echo Blank in Mode 3 is analogous to that of Interface Blank in
Mode 2 or Main Bang Blank in Mode 1. This function creates a blank or dead zone up to
20 microseconds long following the leading edge of the first detected backwall echo, to
prevent detection of trailing lobes or cycles of that echo and the resulting gage hang-up.
Because Mode 3 Echo Blank limits minimum measurable thickness, set the controls as
short as possible; typically no longer than a few hundred nanoseconds. Special cases may
be an exception where mode conversion effects on curved samples cause significant
spurious signals between legitimate echo peaks; in such cases set the Mode 3 Echo Blank
as long as necessary to prevent detection of the spurious signals.

Figure 60

NMM

Gage Hanging up on
Gage Hanging up on Trailing Edge of Backwall 1

r=`=p

Figure 61

5.10.4

M3Blank Set Properly

Making Setup Adjustment


To make setup adjustments, follow these steps:
1. Press [2ND F], (SETUP ADJ) and the gage displays the first setup adjustment
parameter just below the waveform area of the display.

Figure 62

Adjusting the Setup Parameter

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to select which parameter to adjust.


3. Press [

5.10.5

] or [

] to change the value of the parameter.

Setting Up a Mode 1 Barrier Layer Measurement


Use Mode 1 (Barrier Layer Thickness) only with direct contact Transducer. Make sure
that the mode is set to Mode 1 and the MeasType is set to Barrier Layer. When setting up
for this measurement , adjust the Transducer Setup parameters so the reflection from the
barrier layer material is detected by the gage as show below:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NMN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Data 1 window

Barrier layer
reflection

Figure 63

Backwall
echo from
total thickness

Detecting the Barrier Layer Material in Mode 1

When the proper Barrier echo is being detected the user must adjust the width of the Data
Window 1 so it is large enough to included the entire Barrier layer reflection but not
include the main bang echo or Backwall Echo. Save each Custom setup so you can recall
it or use it as part of a Multi-Measurement feature. (See Saving Setup Parameters on page
103.)

5.10.6

Setting Up a Mode 2 Barrier Layer Measurement


Use Mode 2 (Barrier Layer Thickness) only with Delay line or Immersion Transducers.
Make sure that the mode is set to Mode 2 and the MeasType is set to Barrier Layer. When
setting up this measurement, adjust the Transducer Setup parameters as you would in a
normal Mode 2 measurement from interface to Barrier reflection as show below:
Surface
reflection
or interface
echo

Data 1
window

Figure 64

Barrier layer
reflection

Data 2 window

Detecting the Barrier Layer Material in Mode 2

When the proper Barrier echoes are being detected the user must adjust the width of the
Data Window 1 so it is large enough to include the entire interface echo but does include
the main bang echo or Barrier Echo reflection. Data Window 2 must be adjusted so it is

NMO

r=`=p

large enough to included the entire Barrier layer reflection but not include the interface
echo or Backwall Echo. Make sure to save each Custom setup so that you can recall it or
use it as part of a Multi-Measurement feature. (See Saving Setup Parameters on page
103.)

5.10.7

Saving Setup Parameters


Once the proper adjustments are made, you can store the settings for a quick and easy
recall. The Model 25MULTI PLUS can store up to 35 custom setups in its internal
memory.
To save setup parameters, follow these steps:
1. Make the appropriate changes to the setup parameters.
2. Press [RECALL SETUP] and [ENTER]. The Recall Setup Select screen opens.

Figure 65

Displaying Recall Setups

The changes that were made are located in the active setup.
3. Press [SAVE] and the Recall Setup Save screen opens.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NMP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Figure 66

Saving Recall Setups

4. Press [ ], [ ], [
Press [ENTER].

], [

], and numeric keys to enter a name for the Custom Setup.

5. Press [ ] and [ ] to select a location to store the Custom Setup.


Setups named User-1 through User-35 are empty locations. Use caution when
selecting a location that already contains a custom setup because the new setup will
replace the old information.
6. Press [SAVE] to save the Custom Setup at the selected location. Pressing [MEAS]
key the save function and returns to the Measure mode.

NMQ

j~~==a~~

Managing the Datalogger


Two very useful features of the Model 25MULTI PLUS are the internal datalogger and the
two-way serial communication (RS-232) interface. The operation of the Datalogger and
data transmission are discussed in this section. (See Appendix C - Serial Interface on page
193 for more information.)
An optional Bar Code Wand is available. (See Appendix F - Accessories and Replacement
Parts on page 231.) This bar code wand directs measurement location ID numbers into the
gage by simply scanning bar code labels. The Bar Code Wand plugs directly into the gage
I/O connector.
Topics are as follows:

6.1

Understanding the Datalogger

Organizing the Datalogger

Creating Data Files

Opening a File

Copying a File

Deleting a File

Editing/Renaming a File

Creating or Editing Comment Tables from a Computer

Creating or Editing Comment Tables from the Model 25MULTI PLUS

Saving Data

Using the Review ID Mode

Using the Edit ID Mode

Erasing Data

Using the Optional Bar Code Wand to Enter an ID Number

Generating Reports

Understanding the Datalogger


The Model 25MULTI PLUS datalogger has a built-in file and data management system.
Each thickness reading and/or waveform is stored and tagged with an alphanumeric
identification number and file name with descriptive fields. A complete description of the
measurement type, gage calibration and setup parameters is stored along with each
reading. The following are just a few datalogger functions:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Store the waveform display with any thickness measurement

Recall stored data to the gage displays, printed out, or sent to a computer

Receive previously transmitted thickness and waveform data back from a computer

NMR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

View current datalogger settings while simultaneously taking measurements as,


shown below:
File Name

ID#
Previous
Thickness

Figure 67

Date/Time
Comment
Notes

Identifying Datalogger Settings

You can store either thickness measurements only or thickness measurements with an
associated waveform. When each measurement is stored, the gage also stores a complete
description of the measurement conditions with the measurement. The additional data
stored with each thickness value includes:

NMS

File Name

File Header Data

Identifier

Units (in or mm)

LOS (Loss of Signal)

Differential Mode

Differential Reference Value

Alarm Mode

Alarm Status

Alarm Set Points

Minimum or Maximum Mode

Minimum or Maximum Reading

Velocity

Resolution

Transducer Setup Number and Information

j~~==a~~

When a waveform is stored, the following additional information is stored with it:

Zoom Status

Horizontal Axis Limits

Detection Marker Position

Delay

Range

Rectification Mode

You can store a maximum of 18,000 thickness values without waveforms at any one time
in the standard Model 25MULTI PLUS version. You can also store up to 1,700 thickness
values with waveforms. The memory is expandible in two increments of 1 MB each. The
first memory upgrade allows a maximum of 36,000 thickness values or 3,400 waveforms
with thickness values. The second memory upgrade allows a maximum of 54,000
thickness values or 5,100 waveforms with thickness values. Contact Panametrics-NDTTM
for details about how to upgrade the memory.

6.2

Organizing the Datalogger


The Model 25MULTI PLUS datalogger is a flexible file based system. Every
measurement stored into the datalogger is tagged with an file name and identification
number (ID number). The file name and ID number may be thought of as the name of the
place in the gage memory where the measurement data is stored. This description usually
corresponds to the physical location numbers of each measurement point in the actual
application. ID numbers may also be associated with up to four Comments. The database
can store a user defined number of files with descriptive headers and each file has a user
defined number of identifiers.
When stored data is printed or loaded into a computer and later recalled back to the gage,
each measurement is always uniquely identified by the file name and ID number where it
was initially stored.

6.2.1

File Name Structure


File names consist of up to eight alphanumeric characters. Allowable characters are as
follows:
0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
-.#
The total number of files is only limited by the number of identifiers. The file name is
limited to eight DOS legal file name characters.

6.2.2

Identifier (ID Number) Structure


ID numbers consist of up to 16 alphanumeric characters. Allowable characters are as
follows:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NMT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
space - . / , : # *
The allowable number of ID numbers within a file is dependent on the total number of
identifiers in the datalogger. There are no restrictions on the use of any allowed character
at any position in an ID number except that you cannot use a space as either the first or last
character of the ID number.

6.2.3

File Name Header Structure


The file name header is a series of fields designed for additional descriptive information
pertaining to a file. These fields include the following:
File Description
Inspector ID
Location-Note
Each field in the header consists of from 0 to 32 alphanumeric characters. Allowable
characters are as follows:
0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
space - . / , : # *
here are no restrictions on the use of any allowed character at any position in a header field
except that you cannot use a space as either the first or last character of the ID number.
The following screen shows the fields that are available in the header for user
customization:

Figure 68

NMU

Creating a File Name

j~~==a~~

6.2.4

Comment Structure
Use Comments to annotate individual measurement sites in the database for unusual
measurement conditions. Save these notes with or without the thickness measurement
data as a permanent record of conditions encountered at the time of the survey.
Typical Comments are:

THIN AREA

THICK AREA

OUT OF TOLERANCE

MIN THICKNESS

MAX THICKNESS

NO READING

SEE WAVEFORM

A comment is a 16 character text note that can attach to a thickness reading in the database.
The gage is capable of storing a maximum of 26 different comments per file, each of
which is identified by a comment code letter A, B, ...Z. Comments are user definable for
each file and can be alphanumeric. You can store 1 to 4 comments per thickness reading.
Allowable characters are as follows:
0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ
space - . / , : # *
There are no restrictions on the use of any allowed character at any position in a comment
except that you cannot use a space as either the first or last character of the ID number.
All comments stored with a reading appear as their associated letter code in the flags
section of the transmitted output. The full definition of each comment is written out in its
entirety in a comment table once transferred to a computer or printer.You can also view
Comment code definitions on the gage display as shown below.

Figure 69

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Creating a Note

NMV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

(See Creating or Editing Comment Tables from the Model 25MULTI PLUS on page 141
for further instructions on using comments in the datalogger.)

6.3

Creating Data Files


Create Data Files for the Model 25MULTI PLUS datalogger from a computer or from
within the Model 25MULTI PLUS.
Throughout this section there are references to use the Model 25MULTI PLUS Standard
Editing Commands. These commands are described in the section below.

6.3.1

Using the Model 25MULTI PLUS Standard Editing Commands


To enter a number at any character location, do the following:
Press any numeric key to change the character at the cursor to the digit selected and the
cursor automatically advances one position to the right.
To enter a letter or a symbol at any character location, follow these steps:
1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select a letter or punctuation mark.
2. Press and quickly release a slewing key to change the character by one value.
Hold a slewing key down to continuously cycle through the letters and punctuation
marks until the desired character is displayed.
Tip:

NNM

The [ ] key moves forward from A to Z then * # : , / . - blank A etc. The [ ]


key moves backward from - . / , # : * Z to A blank - etc. After selecting an
alpha character, press [ ] or [ ] to move the cursor position to another
character.

j~~==a~~

Figure 70

Organization of Character Cycle

To insert a character at the cursor position, do the following:


Press [ZERO]. The character at the cursor and all those to the right moves one
position to the right, making a space for a new character.
To delete the character at the cursor position, do the following:
Press [VEL]. The character at the cursor is deleted and any characters to the right
moves left one position to fill-in the empty space.

6.3.2

Creating Files from a Computer (using the optional WIN25DL PLUS)


See the WIN25DL PLUS Interface Program Instruction Manual (part number 910-222)
designed for use with the Model 25MULTI PLUS.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NNN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

6.3.3

Creating Files from the Model 25MULTI PLUS


To create files from the Model 25MULTI PLUS, follow these steps:
1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens:

Figure 71

Selecting the Create Option

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Create option.


3. Press [ENTER]. The following menu opens:

Figure 72

Selecting a File Type

4. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight a file type.


There are seven file types to choose from in the Model 25MULTI PLUS:

NNO

Incremental

Sequential

Sequential with Custom Points

2-D Grid Matrix

2-D Grid Matrix with Custom Points

3-D Grid Matrix

3-D Custom

j~~==a~~

Note:

As the list of file types is scrolled through, the right hand side of the display
dynamically responds showing the required entry parameters to create the
specific file types.

5. Highlight a file type and press [ENTER].

6.3.3.1

Incremental
After entering a starting ID number (up to 16 alphanumeric characters long) the gage
automatically increments to the subsequent ID numbers using the following incrementing
rules:

Only that portion of an ID number consisting of digits and letters (no punctuation
marks) beginning with the right-most character and extending leftward to the first
punctuation mark or to the left-most character (whichever comes first) can increment.

Digits are cycled 0, 1, 2, ..., 9, 0, etc. The 9 to 0 transition is done only after
incrementing the character to the left. Letters are cycled A, B, C, ..., Z, A, etc. The Z to
A transition is done only after incrementing the character to the left. In either case, if
there is no character to the left, or if the character to the left is a punctuation mark then
the ID number cannot increment.

If an ID number cannot increment, then after a reading is saved, an long error beep
sounds and the momentary message CANNOT INCREMENT is shown on the
waveform display. Subsequent saves overwrite readings if you do not manually
change the ID number first.

Note:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

To make the gage increment through a range of numbers several digits wide
while beginning with a single digit ID number, the maximum number of
digit positions must be entered initially using leading zeroes. See Example 1.

NNP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Example 1: Some Automatically Generated Incremented ID Number Series

1. Initial

Limit

2. Initial

Limit
3. Initial

Limit

NNQ

1
2
3
.
.
.
9

ABC
ABD
ABE
.
.
.
ABZ
ACA
ACB
.
.
.
ZZZ
ABC*12*34
ABC*12*35
ABC*12*36
.
.
.
ABC*12*99

4. Initial

Limit
5. Initial

Limit

0001
0002
0003
.
.
.
0009
0010
.
.
.
9999
1A
1B
1C
.
.
.
1Z
2A
2B
.
.
.
9Z

j~~==a~~

To create an Incremental File, follow these steps:


1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens.
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Create option.The following screen opens:

Figure 73

Selecting an Incremental File Type

3. Select the Incremental option.


4. Enter the desired starting ID number for the data file. (See Using the Model 25MULTI
PLUS Standard Editing Commands on page 110 for more detail about entering data.)
Press [ENTER].
5. Press [ENTER]. The Continue option is highlighted.
6. Press [ENTER] to continue or press [
you want to cancel the operation.
Note:

] or [

] to highlight the Cancel option if

At any time, you can press [2nd F], [ ] or [2nd F], [ ] to tab between entry
fields on the display. This is helpful if an error is made and you want to tab
back to a previous field.

If you select the Continue option, the following screen opens:

Figure 74

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Enter Incremental File Information

NNR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Continue with the following steps:


1. Enter a file name using the gages editing commands. A file name may consist of one
to eight DOS legal characters. Press [ENTER].
Enter File Description, Inspector ID, and Location-Note fields using the same
process. After each entry, press [ENTER] to tab to the next field.
2. Select On or Off for the Delete Protection option by pressing [
[ENTER].

] or [

]. Press

On: Provides a warning whenever you try to delete the file.


Off: Allows the file to be deleted from the datalogger.

3. Select Normal, Soft Contact, or PCT Total THK for the File Mode option by
pressing [ ] or [ ]. Press [ENTER]. This is the final selection of the screen.
Normal: Designates a file used to save non-multi measurement or normal multimeasurement thickness values.
Soft Contact: Designates a file used to save saggital height, lens thickness, and radius
of curvature values.
PCT Total THK: Designates a file used to save thickness or percent of total thickness
values.
Note:

In order to successfully create the file, a file name must be assigned using the
gages editing commands. All other fields in this screen are optional.

4. Select the Done or Cancel option by pressing [

] and [

]. Press [ENTER].

Cancel: The gage terminates the file create process and returns to the Measure mode
with the file and ID number unchanged. The datalogger contents remain unchanged.
The file is not created.
Done: The gage returns to the Measure mode with this new file as the active file and
the first ID number in the file as the active ID number.

6.3.3.2

Sequential
A Sequential File is defined by a starting and an ending ID number. The resulting file is
inclusive of the starting and ending points and all points in between.
Example 2: Start ID# = ABC123

End ID# = ABC135


Resulting file would contain the following list of ID numbers:
ABC123
ABC124
ABC125
.
.
.

NNS

j~~==a~~

ABC135
Example 3: Start ID# = XY-GY

End ID# = XY-IB


Resulting file would contain the following list of ID numbers:
XY-GY
XY-GZ
XY-HA
.
.
.
XY-IB
To create an Sequential file, follow these steps:
1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens.
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Create option.The following screen opens:

Figure 75

Selecting a Sequential File Type

3. Select the Sequential option.


4. Enter the desired starting ID number for the data file. (See Using the Model 25MULTI
PLUS Standard Editing Commands on page 110 for more detail about entering data.)
Press [ENTER].
5. Enter an ending ID number. Press [ENTER].
The Continue option is highlighted.
6. Press [ENTER] to continue or press [
you wish to cancel the operation.
Note:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

] or [

] to highlight the Cancel option if

At any time, you can press [2nd F], [ ] or [2nd F], [ ] to tab between entry
fields on the display. This is helpful if an error is made and you want to tab
back to a previous field.

NNT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

If you select the Continue option, the following screen opens:

Figure 76

Entering Sequential File Information

7. Enter a file name using the gages editing commands. A file name may consist of one
to eight DOS legal characters. Press [ENTER].
Enter File Description, Inspector ID, and Location-Note fields using the same
process. After each entry, press [ENTER] to tab to the next field.
8. Select On or Off for the Delete Protection option by pressing [
[ENTER].

] or [

]. Press

On: Provides a warning whenever you try to delete the file.


Off: Allows the file to be deleted from the datalogger.

9. Select Normal, Soft Contact, or PCT Total THK for the File Mode option by
pressing [ ] or [ ]. Press [ENTER]. This is the final selection of the screen.
Normal: Designates a file used to save non-multi measurement or normal multimeasurement thickness values.
Soft Contact: Designates a file used to save saggital height, lens thickness, and radius
of curvature values.
PCT Total THK: Designates a file used to save thickness or percent of total thickness
values.
Note:

In order to successfully create the file, a file name must be assigned using the
gages editing commands. All other fields in this screen are optional.

10. Select the Done or Cancel option by pressing [

] and [

]. Press [ENTER].

Cancel: The gage terminates the file create process and returns to the Measure mode
with the file and ID number unchanged. The datalogger contents remain unchanged.
The file is not created.
Done: The gage returns to the Measure mode with this new file as the active file and
the first ID number in the file as the active ID number.

NNU

j~~==a~~

6.3.3.3

Sequential with Custom Point


A Sequential File with Custom Point is defined by a starting and an ending ID number plus
a series of custom points. The resulting file is inclusive of the starting and ending points
and all points in between. In addition, multiple thickness readings per ID number location
are assigned using the assigned custom points.
Example 4: This example describes measurements along a pipe or tube where at each
ID number location you can take measurements at Top, Bottom, Left and Right of the
pipe.

Starting ID# = XYZ1267


Ending ID# = XYZ1393
Custom Points = TOP
BOTTOM
LEFT
RIGHT
Resulting file would contain the following list of ID numbers:
XYZ1267TOP
XYZ1267BOTTOM
XYZ1267LEFT
XYZ1267RIGHT
XYZ1268TOP
XYZ1268BOTTOM
XYZ1268LEFT
.
.
.
XYZ1393RIGHT
You can enter up to 31 custom points. The allowable length for each custom point depends
on the ID number length defined in the starting and ending ID number fields. The total
length of the ID number plus the custom points cannot exceed 16 characters. For example:
if the starting and ending ID numbers are seven characters long, as in the above example,
the maximum allowable length for each custom point is nine (16-7=9).
To create a Sequential with Custom Point file, follow these steps:
1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens.
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Create option.The following screen opens:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NNV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Figure 77

Selecting a Sequential with Custom Point File Type

3. Select the Sequential with Custom Point option.


4. Enter the desired starting ID number for the data file. (See Using the Model 25MULTI
PLUS Standard Editing Commands on page 110 for more detail about entering data.)
Press [ENTER].
5. Enter an ending ID number. Press [ENTER].
The Custom Point selection box is highlighted.
6. Enter the first custom point using the editing controls. Press [ENTER].
The gage proceeds to the next field for custom point entry.
7. Enter the second custom point and press [ENTER]. Continue this process until all
desired custom points are entered.
When finished entering custom points, press [ENTER] on a blank entry. The
Continue option is highlighted.
8. Press [ENTER] to continue or press [
you want to cancel the operation.
Note:

] or [

] to highlight the Cancel option if

At any time, you can press [2nd F], [ ] or [2nd F], [ ] to tab between entry
fields on the display. This is helpful if an error is made and you want to tab
back to a previous field.

If you select the Continue option, the following screen opens:

NOM

j~~==a~~

Figure 78

Entering Sequential with Custom Point File Information

Continue with the following steps:


1. Enter a file name using the gages editing commands. A file name may consist of one
to eight DOS legal characters. Press [ENTER].
Enter File Description, Inspector ID, and Location-Note fields using the same
process. After each entry, press [ENTER] to tab to the next field.
2. Select On or Off for the Delete Protection option by pressing [
[ENTER].

] or [

]. Press

On: Provides a warning whenever you try to delete the file.


Off: Allows the file to be deleted from the datalogger.

3. Select Normal, Soft Contact, or PCT Total THK for the File Mode option by
pressing [ ] or [ ]. Press [ENTER]. This is the final selection of the screen.
Normal: Designates a file used to save non-multi measurement or normal multimeasurement thickness values.
Soft Contact: Designates a file used to save saggital height, lens thickness, and radius
of curvature values.
PCT Total THK: Designates a file used to save thickness or percent of total thickness
values.
Note:

In order to successfully create the file, a file name must be assigned using the
gages editing commands. All other fields in this screen are optional.

4. Select the Done or Cancel option by pressing [

] and [

]. Press [ENTER].

Cancel: The gage terminates the file create process and returns to the Measure mode
with the file and ID number unchanged. The datalogger contents remain unchanged.
The file is not created.
Done: The gage returns to the Measure mode with this new file as the active file and
the first ID number in the file as the active ID number.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NON

j=ORjriqf=mirp

6.3.3.4

2-D Matrix Grid


A grid is a sequence of ID numbers arranged to describe a path through a two-dimensional
or three-dimensional matrix. Each part of the ID number corresponds to a particular
matrix dimension.
A 2-D (two-dimensional) sequence begins with the ID number that refers to the first
column and the first row. Then the column (or row) increments one value at a time until the
sequence reaches the last column (or row) value while the other dimension value stays
constant. At this point the other dimension increments from its first to its last value. This
continues until the ID number that refers to the last column and last row is reached. Note,
either the columns or the rows can be selected to increment first. Refer to the following
figure.

Figure 79

General Grid Database

How is a grid used? A grid structure may associate one dimension of the grid (e.g., the
columns) with the physical parts whose wall thickness is to be measured. The particular
measurement points on each part are then associated with the other dimension of the grid
(e.g., the rows). See the following figure.

NOO

j~~==a~~

Figure 80

One Grid for 75 Identical Parts

Alternatively, the rows and columns of a grid may refer to a two dimensional map of
measurement points on the surface of one part. In this case a different grid is made for each
part. See the following figure.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NOP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Name: Elbow
Rows: 01 thru 10
Columns: A thru E
IDs: Elbow/A0 thru Elbow/E10

Name: Tee
Rows: 1 thru 4
Columns: 1 thru 3
IDs: Tee/11 thru Tee/34

Figure 81

Different Named Grid for Each Part

To create a 2-D Grid file, follow these steps:


1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens.
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Create option.The following screen opens:

Figure 82

NOQ

Selecting a 2D Grid File Type

j~~==a~~

3. Select the 2D Grid option.


4. Enter the desired starting ID number for the data file. (See Using the Model 25MULTI
PLUS Standard Editing Commands on page 110 for more detail about entering data.)
Press [ENTER].
5. Enter the desired ending column. Press [ENTER].
6. Enter the desired starting row for the grid. Press [ENTER].
7. Enter the ending row for the grid. Press [ENTER].
The Increment First By selection is highlighted.
8. Press [ ] or [
[ENTER].

] to select a column or a row for the increment method. Press

The Continue option is highlighted.


9. Press [ENTER] to continue or press [
you wish to cancel the operation.
Note:

] or [

] to highlight the Cancel option if

At any time [2nd F], [ ] or [2nd F], [ ] may be pressed to tab between entry
fields on the display. This is helpful if an error is made and you want to tab
back to a previous field.

If you select the Continue option, the following screen opens:

Figure 83

Entering 2D Grid File Information

Continue with the following steps:


1. Enter a file name using the gages editing commands. A file name may consist of one
to eight DOS legal characters. Press [ENTER].
Enter File Description, Inspector ID, and Location-Note fields using the same
process. After each entry, press [ENTER] to tab to the next field.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NOR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

2. Select On or Off for the Delete Protection option by pressing [


[ENTER].

] or [

]. Press

On: Provides a warning whenever you try to delete the file.


Off: Allows the file to be deleted from the datalogger.

3. Select Normal, Soft Contact, or PCT Total THK for the File Mode option by
pressing [ ] or [ ]. Press [ENTER]. This is the final selection of the screen.
Normal: Designates a file used to save non-multi measurement or normal multimeasurement thickness values.
Soft Contact: Designates a file used to save saggital height, lens thickness, and radius
of curvature values.
PCT Total THK: Designates a file used to save thickness or percent of total thickness
values.
Note:

In order to successfully create the file, a file name must be assigned using the
gages editing commands. All other fields in this screen are optional.

4. Select the Done or Cancel option by pressing [

] and [

]. Press [ENTER].

Cancel: The gage terminates the file create process and returns to the Measure mode
with the file and ID number unchanged. The datalogger contents remain unchanged.
The file is not created.
Done: The gage returns to the Measure mode with this new file as the active file and
the first ID number in the file as the active ID number.

6.3.3.5

2-D Matrix Grid with Custom Point


A grid is a sequence of ID numbers arranged to describe a path through a two-dimensional
or three-dimensional matrix. Each part of the ID number corresponds to a particular
matrix dimension. See 2-D Matrix Grid on page 122 for more information.
Custom points allow multiple readings per Grid ID number to be assigned.
Example 5:

Start Column A
End Column J
Start Row 01
Start Row 17

(Start Grid Coordinate = A01)


(End Grid Coordinate = J17

Custom Points = LEFT


CENTER
RIGHT
Resulting file would contain the following list of ID numbers:
A01LEFT
A01CENTER
A01RIGHT

NOS

j~~==a~~

A02LEFT
.
.
.
J17RIGHT
To create a 2-D Grid with Custom Points file, follow these steps:
1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens.
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Create option.The following screen opens:

Figure 84

Selecting a 2-D Grid with Custom Points File Type

3. Select the 2-D Grid with Custom Points option.


4. Enter the desired starting column for the grid. (See Using the Model 25MULTI PLUS
Standard Editing Commands on page 110 for more detail about entering data.) Press
[ENTER].
5. Enter the ending column. Press [ENTER].
6. Enter the starting row for the grid. Press [ENTER].
7. Enter the ending row for the grid. Press [ENTER].
The Custom Point selection box is highlighted.
Continue with the following steps:
1. Enter the first custom point using the editing controls. Press [ENTER]. The gage
proceeds to the next line for custom point entry.
2. Enter the second custom point. Press [ENTER]. Continue this process until all
desired custom points are entered.
When finished entering custom points, press [ENTER] on a blank entry.
The Increment First By selection is highlighted.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NOT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

3. Press [ ] or [
[ENTER].

] to select column, row or point as the first increment method. Press

The Increment Second By selection is highlighted.


4. Press [ ] or [ ] to select column, row or point as the second increment method.
Press [ENTER].
The Continue option is highlighted.
5. Press [ENTER] to continue or press [
you wish to cancel the operation.
Note:

] or [

] to highlight the Cancel option if

At any time [2nd F], [ ] or [2nd F], [ ] may be pressed to tab between entry
fields on the display. This is helpful if an error is made and you want to tab
back to a previous field.

If you select the Continue option, the following screen opens:

Figure 85

Entering 2D Grid with Custom Points File Information

6. Enter a file name using the gages editing commands. A file name may consist of one
to eight DOS legal characters. Press [ENTER].
Enter File Description, Inspector ID, and Location-Note fields using the same
process. After each entry press [ENTER] to tab to the next field.
7. Select On or Off for the Delete Protection option by pressing [
[ENTER].
On: Provides a warning whenever you try to delete the file.
Off: Allows the file to be deleted from the datalogger.

NOU

] or [

]. Press

j~~==a~~

8. Select Normal, Soft Contact, or PCT Total THK for the File Mode option by
pressing [ ] or [ ]. Press [ENTER]. This is the final selection of the screen.
Normal: Designates a file used to save non-multi measurement or normal multimeasurement thickness values.
Soft Contact: Designates a file used to save saggital height, lens thickness, and radius
of curvature values.
PCT Total THK: Designates a file used to save thickness or percent of total thickness
values.
Note:

In order to successfully create the file, a file name must be assigned using the
gages editing commands. All other fields in this screen are optional.

9. Select the Done or Cancel option by pressing [

] and [

] keys . Press [ENTER].

Cancel: The gage terminates the file create process and returns to the Measure mode
with the file and ID number unchanged. The datalogger contents remain unchanged.
The file is not created.
Done: The gage returns to the Measure mode with this new file as the active file and
the first ID number in the file as the active ID number.

6.3.3.6

3-D Matrix Grid


A 3-D Matrix Grid is a sequence of multi-part ID numbers arranged to describe a path
through a three-dimensional matrix. Each part of the ID number corresponds to a
particular matrix dimension.
A 3-D (three-dimensional) sequence begins with the ID number that refers to the first
column, the first row and the first point. Then the point (or column, or row) increments one
value at a time until the sequence reaches the last point (or column, or row) value while the
other two dimension values stay constant. At this point another dimension increments
from its first to its last value. This continues until the ID number that refers to the last
column, last row and last point is reached. You can select either the columns, rows or
points to increment first.
How is a 3-D Grid Used? A three-dimensional grid structure may associate twodimensions of the grid (e.g., the columns and rows) with the physical coordinates on the
part whose wall thickness is to be measured. The particular measurement points on each
part are then associated with the third dimension of the grid (e.g., the points). This scenario
allows multiple readings to be stored at each grid coordinate.
Example 6:

Start Column = A
End Column = F
Start Row = 1
End Row = 4
Start Point = X
End Point = Z
Resulting file would contain the following list of ID numbers

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NOV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

A1X
A1Y
A1Z
A2X
.
.
.
A4Z
B1X
B1Y
.
.
.
F4Z
Note:

You can select which dimension increments first, second and third. The
example above assumes that you chose to increment the point first, the row
second and the column third.

To create a 3-D Grid with Custom Points file, follow these steps:
1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens.
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Create option.The following screen opens:

Figure 86

Selecting a 3-D Grid with Custom Points File Type

3. Select the 3-D Grid with Custom Points option.


4. Enter the desired starting column for the grid. (See Using the Model 25MULTI PLUS
Standard Editing Commands on page 110 for more detail about entering data.) Press
[ENTER].
5. Enter the desired ending column. Press [ENTER].
6. Enter the desired starting row for the grid. Press [ENTER].
7. Enter the ending row for the grid. Press [ENTER].

NPM

j~~==a~~

8. Enter the starting point for the grid. Press [ENTER].


9. Enter the ending point for the grid. Press [ENTER].
The Increment First By selection is highlighted
Continue with the following steps:
1. Press [ ] or [
[ENTER].

] to select column, row or point as the increment method. Press

The Increment Second By selection is highlighted


2. Press [

] or [

] to select column, row or point. Press [ENTER].

The Continue option is highlighted


3. Press [ENTER] to continue. Alternately, press [
you wish to cancel the operation.
Note:

] or [

] to highlight Cancel if

At any time [2nd F], [ ] or [2nd F], [ ] may be pressed to tab between entry
fields on the display. This is helpful if an error is made and you want to tab
back to a previous field.

If you select the Continue option, the following screen opens:

Figure 87

Entering 3D Grid File Information

4. Enter a file name using the gages editing commands. A file name may consist of one
to eight DOS legal characters. Press [ENTER].
Enter File Description, Inspector ID, and Location-Note field using the same process.
After each entry press the [ENTER] key to tab to the next field.
5. Select On or Off for the Delete Protection option by pressing [
[ENTER].

] or [

]. Press

On: Provides a warning whenever you try to delete the file.


Off: Allows the file to be deleted from the datalogger.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NPN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

6. Select Normal, Soft Contact, or PCT Total THK for the File Mode option by
pressing [ ] or [ ]. Press [ENTER]. This is the final selection of the screen.
Normal: Designates a file used to save non-multi measurement or normal multimeasurement thickness values.
Soft Contact: Designates a file used to save saggital height, lens thickness, and radius
of curvature values.
PCT Total THK: Designates a file used to save thickness or percent of total thickness
values.
Note:

In order to successfully create the file, a file name must be assigned using the
gages editing commands. All other fields in this screen are optional.

7. Select the Done or Cancel option by pressing [

] and [

]. Press [ENTER].

Cancel: The gage terminates the file create process and returns to the Measure mode
with the file and ID number unchanged. The datalogger contents remain unchanged.
The file is not created.
Done: The gage returns to the Measure mode with this new file as the active file and
the first ID number in the file as the active ID number.

6.3.3.7

3-D Custom
A 3-D custom file is a special file type designed for 3-D file application where two of the
dimensions are user defined custom lists. This allows you to define the custom Row and
Custom point as a list of user defined items. The first dimension is the column referring to
a starting and ending vertical column. The second dimension is the Custom Row referring
to a user defined custom list of rows. The third dimension is the Custom Point referring to
a user defined custom list of points. When these three dimension are defined, the result is
a single ID number formed to precisely identify the exact location for each thickness
reading:
Example 7:
Column
Start column = 01
End column = 10
Custom Row = (TOP, Middle, Bottom)
Custom Point = LEFT and Right
Increment first by Custom Point and Second by Column
The resulting file would contain the following list of ID numbers:
01TOP-LEFT
01TOP-RIGHT
02TOP-LEFT
02TOP-RIGHT
03TOP-LEFT
03TOP-RIGHT

NPO

j~~==a~~

.
.
.
10BOTTOM-RIGHT
To create a 3-D Custom file, follow these steps:
1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens.
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Create option.The following screen opens:

Figure 88

Selecting a 3-D Custom File Type

3. Select the 3-D Custom option.


4. Enter the desired starting column number for the grid. (See Using the Model
25MULTI PLUS Standard Editing Commands on page 110 for more detail about
entering data.) Press [ENTER].
5. Enter the desired ending column number. Press [ENTER].
The Custom Row selection box is highlighted.
6. Enter the first custom row using the editing controls. Press [ENTER].
The gage proceeds to the next line for custom row entry.
7. Edit the second custom row and press [ENTER].
Continue this process until all desired custom rows have been entered. When finished
entering custom rows press [ENTER] on a blank entry.
The Points selection box is highlighted.
8. Enter the first desired Custom Point using the editing controls. Press [ENTER].
The gage proceeds to the next line for point entry.
9. Edit the second point and press [ENTER].
Continue this process until all desired points have been entered. When finished
entering points press [ENTER] on a blank entry.
The Increment First By selection is highlighted.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NPP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Continue with the following steps:


1. Press [ ] or [
[ENTER].

] to select row, column or point as the increment method. Press

The Increment Second By selection is highlighted.


2. Press [

] or [

] to select row, column or point. Press [ENTER].

The Continue option is highlighted.


3. Press [ENTER] to continue or press [
you wish to cancel the operation.
Note:

] or [

] to highlight the Cancel option if

At any time [2nd F], [ ] or [2nd F], [ ] may be pressed to tab between entry
fields on the display. This is helpful if an error is made and you want to tab
back to a previous field.

If you select the Continue option, the following screen opens:

Figure 89

Entering 3-D Custom File Information

4. Enter a file name using the gages editing commands. A file name may consist of one
to eight DOS legal characters. Press [ENTER].
Enter File Description, Inspector ID, and Location-Note field using the same process.
After each entry press [ENTER] to tab to the next field.
5. Select On or Off for the Delete Protection option by pressing [
[ENTER].
On: Provides a warning whenever you try to delete the file.
Off: Allows the file to be deleted from the datalogger.

NPQ

] or [

]. Press

j~~==a~~

6. Select Normal, Soft Contact, or PCT Total THK for the File Mode option by
pressing [ ] or [ ]. Press [ENTER]. This is the final selection of the screen.
Normal: Designates a file used to save non-multi measurement or normal multimeasurement thickness values.
Soft Contact: Designates a file used to save saggital height, lens thickness, and radius
of curvature values.
PCT Total THK: Designates a file used to save thickness or percent of total thickness
values.
Note:

In order to successfully create the file, a file name must be assigned using the
gages editing commands. All other fields in this screen are optional.

7. Select the Done or Cancel option by pressing [

] and [

]. Press [ENTER].

Cancel: The gage terminates the file create process and returns to the Measure mode
with the file and ID number unchanged. The datalogger contents remain unchanged.
The file is not created.
Done: The gage returns to the Measure mode with this new file as the active file and
the first ID number in the file as the active ID number.

6.4

Opening a File
Use the File Open function to retrieve a file stored in the datalogger and mark it as the
active file in the Measure mode.
To open a File, follow these steps:
1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens.:

Figure 90

Selecting Open Option

2. Highlight the Open option by pressing [ ] and [ ]. Press [ENTER]. The following
screen opens:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NPR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Figure 91

Opening a File

3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the name of a file to open. Press [ENTER].


The Open option is highlighted.
Note:

When scrolling through the file names, a descriptive header for the
highlighted file name appears on the lower section of the display. This
information can assist in selecting the proper file if you are uncertain of the
exact file name.

4. Press [ENTER] to confirm opening the file. If you want to terminate the action press
[ ] or [ ] to highlight the Cancel option. Press [ENTER].
If you select the Open option, the gage returns to the Measure mode with the selected
file as the active file and the ID number is set to the first ID number in the file.

6.5

Copying a File
You can duplicate a file that already exists in the datalogger by using the File Copy
function. This function provides two options:

Copy the entire file including stored thickness data

Copy the file ID number structure only

The File Copy function is useful when a new file needs to be created with the exact same
structure as a previous file.
To copy a file, follow these steps:
1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens.

NPS

j~~==a~~

Figure 92

Selecting the Copy Option

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Copy option. Press [ENTER]. The following menu
opens:

Figure 93

Copying a File

3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the name of the file that the new file is being copied
from. Press [ENTER].
4. Use the Model 25MULTI PLUS editing controls to input the name of the new file
being created. Press [ENTER].
The Include Thickness Data? field is highlighted.
5. Press [

] and [

] keys to choose Yes or No. Press [ENTER].

This selection determines if previously stored thickness readings from the original file
are copied into the new file. If you select No, the ID Numbers are copied, but the
thickness field is left blank.
The Copy option is highlighted.
6. Press [ENTER] to confirm the File Copy.
If you wish to terminate the File Copy, press [
option and press [ENTER].

] or [

] to highlight the Cancel

7. Use the File Open commands to activate the newly copied file. (See Opening a File on
page 135.)

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NPT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

6.6

Deleting a File
The File Delete function is used to Erase files from the datalogger memory.
Note:

Once a file is deleted there is no way to recover any information that was
once contained in that file unless it has previously been copied to another file
or transferred to a printer or computer.

There are two methods for deleting a file.


To delete a file stored in the Model 25MULTI PLUS, follow these steps:
1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens.

Figure 94

Selecting the Delete Option

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Delete option. Press [ENTER]. The following
menu opens:

Figure 95

Deleting a File

3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the name of a file to delete. Press [ENTER].


The Delete option is highlighted.

NPU

j~~==a~~

Note:

When scrolling through the file names, a descriptive header for the
highlighted file name appears on the lower section of the display. This
information can assist in selecting the proper file if you are uncertain of the
exact file name.

4. Press [ENTER] to confirm erasing all data and file structure. If you wish to terminate
this process press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Cancel option and press [ENTER].

To delete an active file, follow these steps:


1. Press [2nd F], [FILE] (CLR MEM). The ID - Range CLR screen opens:

Figure 96

Deleting an Active File

2. Use the editing function to define the beginning ID location. Press [ENTER].
3. Use the editing function to define the ending ID location. Press [ENTER].
4. Press [

6.7

] or [

] to select the Delete option and press [ENTER].

Editing/Renaming a File
The File Edit-Rename function is used to change/edit one or all of the following fields in
a file:

File Name

File Description

Inspector ID

Location-Note

Delete Protection (On/Off)

This function does not let you edit the File type and is not used for editing individual
Measurement Identifiers or actual Thickness Readings.
1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NPV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Figure 97

Selecting the Edit-Rename Option

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Edit-Rename option. Press [ENTER]. The File
Edit-Rename screen opens:

Figure 98

Entering New File Information

3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the name of the file to edit or rename. Press [ENTER].
You can now edit the fields in the lower section of the display with the exception of the
File Type. The first field highlighted is the file name field. Edit this field using the
Model 25MULTI PLUS Standard Editing Controls. (See Using the Model 25MULTI
PLUS Standard Editing Commands on page 110.)
Note:

While scrolling through the file names in the database, the lower section of
the display will dynamically display the descriptive file header information
for each file. This will assist in choosing the proper file if the file name is
unknown.

4. Press [ENTER] after completing the edits. The File Description field for editing is
highlighted.
Continue this procedure until all desired fields are edited. At any time press [2nd F],
[ ] and [2nd F], [ ] to move from one field to another.

NQM

j~~==a~~

6.8

Creating or Editing Comment Tables from a


Computer
Using a computer to create comment tables is faster and easier than manually creating
them on the Model 25MULTI PLUS. For details see the WIN25DL PLUS interface
program instruction manual designed for use with the Model 25MULTI PLUS.

6.9

Creating or Editing Comment Tables from the Model


25MULTI PLUS
To create or edit comment tables, follow these steps:
1. Open the file that contains the Comment Table that you want to edit by using the File
Open option. (See Opening a File on page 135.)
2. Press [2nd F], [ID#] (NOTE).
If there are no previous comments, the Notes screen opens.

Figure 99

Entering Information for the Comment Table

Note:

If there are any previous comments, the screen may show those comments.

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the letter code for the comment you wish to program. A
comment is assigned a letter code A-Z.
4. Press [ ] and [ ] to activate the Edit mode. (See Using the Model 25MULTI
PLUS Standard Editing Commands on page 110 for more detail about entering data.)

6.9.1

Deleting Comments from a Comment Table


To delete a particular comment text, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [ID#] (Note).

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NQN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

2. Press [ ] or [ ] until the desired comment to delete is highlighted.


3. Press [

] or [

] to enter Edit mode.

4. Press [

] or [

] to move the cursor.

5. Press [VEL] to delete the characters in the comment. The comment text will be erased.
Deleting comment text does not delete comment codes from the measurement
database.
Note:

6.9.2

The text of comment codes that are already stored with measurements in the
current database should not be deleted since that destroys the meaning of the
stored codes. You can delete the text for unused comment codes at any time.

Copying a Note
The Note Copy function can be used to copy a note table from one file to another file in
the Model 25MULTI PLUS. This is very useful when you are creating files from the
Model 25MULTI PLUS and want to use a common note table.
To Copy a Note Table, follow these steps:
1. Press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens.
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Note-Copy option. Press [ENTER].

Figure 100 Selecting the Note-Copy Option

3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the file (source file) that contains the Note Table you
want to copy. Press [ENTER].

NQO

j~~==a~~

Figure 101 Selecting a Note to Copy

4. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the file (destination file) that you want to copy. Press
[ENTER].

Figure 102 Copying a Note

6.10

5. Press [

] and [

] to select the Copy option or Cancel option. Press [ENTER].

Note:

Copying a comment table to a file that has existing stored comments may
redefine the meaning of existing stored comments. For example, if A = Hot
Surfaces in the original comment table and you copy a comment table where
A = Painted Surfaces, it changes the definition of A, and thus changes the
meaning of any previous stored A comments.

Saving Data
Store displayed thickness value or both the thickness and waveform in the datalogger
using the [SAVE] key. All of the appropriate calibration and setup parameters are also

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NQP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

stored simultaneously. (See Understanding the Datalogger on page 105 for a complete
description of what is stored in the datalogger.)
If a measurement is already stored at the current ID number, pressing [SAVE] overwrites
the old thickness reading with the current thickness reading unless the overwrite
protection feature is enabled. (See Operating the ID Overwrite Protection on page 80.)
If you do not want to save a measurement at a specific ID, press [SAVE] while no
measurement is taken. The gage will store an LOS condition and -.- at the specific ID
number.

6.10.1

Saving Thickness Readings in Single Measurement Mode


To save a thickness reading, do the following:
While the thickness value is being displayed, press [SAVE].
An audible beep indicates that the reading is saved. The displayed thickness value and
setup information is stored at the current ID number in the current file. If the thickness
display is blank when [SAVE] is pressed, then - is saved in place of a value.
The ID number is automatically updated to the next ID number in the sequence. The new
ID number is indicated on the display. If the ID number cannot be updated a long beep
sounds and the gage displays a message explaining why the ID was unable to update. In
this case, the ID number on the display remains unchanged.

6.10.2

Saving Thickness and Waveform


To save a thickness and waveform, do the following:
While the thickness value is displayed, press [2nd F], [SAVE].
An audible beep indicates that the reading is saved. The displayed thickness value,
waveform and setup information are stored at the current ID number in the current file. If
the thickness display is blank when you press [SAVE], then - is saved in place of a
value.
The ID number is automatically updated to the next ID number in the sequence. The new
ID number is indicated on the display. If the ID number cannot be updated a long beep
sounds and the gage displays a message explaining why the ID was unable to update. In
this case, the ID number on the display remains unchanged.

6.10.3

Saving Thickness Readings in Multi-measurement Mode


The 25MULTI PLUS can only store the active measurement into the internal datalogger.
In the Multi-Measurement setup you have the option to chose either Save Active or AutoIncrement Active.
Save Active: Saves only the active measurement into the datalogger. The active
measurement is the one measurement that is displayed in large characters and is also
the measurement that is indicated in the AMS Flag box near the Top right corner of the
display. Chose this option if you would like to view the individual layer thickness
values but only want to store the thickness for a single layer into the internal
datalogger.

NQQ

j~~==a~~

Auto-Increment Active: Saves thickness measurements for each individual thickness


layer into the internal datalogger. When Auto-Increment Active is selected the gage
will automatically change the Active Measurement to the next measurement in the
Mult-Measurement list when the Save key is pressed. For example the user would
have to press the save key three time to save each thickness measurement in a three
layer Multi-Measurement setup.

Figure 103 AMS1 (0.2246 in.) Active Setup

For example, AMS1 (0.2246 in.) is the active setup in the figure above. When
pressing [SAVE] the active setup is saved to the datalogger. The gage automatically
changes the AMS # to AMS2 (0.0088 in.) as shown in the figure below.

Figure 104 AMS2 (0.0088 in.) Active Setup

Pressing the save key again saves AMS2 (0.0088 in.) to the datalogger and
automatically switches to AMS3 (0.1598 in.) as shown in the figure below.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NQR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Figure 105 AMS3 (0.1598 in.) Active Setup

Pressing the save key again saves the thickness value at AMS3 (0.1598 in.) to the
datalogger. The gage will start over at AMS1.
Note:

You can save only one thickness measurement per ID# location into the
internal datalogger, therefore it is important to chose an appropriate file
format to best describe the stored thickness data. Panametrics-NDTTM
recommends using Sequential with Custom Points file format as an easy way
to organize your data.

Example:

In order to store 3 thickness readings at each transducer location representing the


thickness of the top layer, barrier Layer and the bottom layer of a three layer plastic
container, setup a Sequential with Custom Points format for the file.
Starting Point:

01

Ending Point:

10

Custom Points:

TOP
BARRIER
BOTTOM

The resulting file is:


01-TOP
01-BARRIER
01-BOTTOM
02-TOP
02-BARRIER
02-BOTTOM
03-TOP

NQS

j~~==a~~

03-BARRIER
03-BOTTOM

10-BOTTOM

6.10.4

Saving Comments
Up to four comments may be stored at each identifier within a file.
To save a comment, follow these steps:
1. Press [2nd F], [ID#] (Note). The Notes table opens, similar to the display shown
below.

Figure 106 Selecting a Comment from the Notes Table

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the desired comment to be stored. Press [ENTER]. The
selected comment is marked with a square in the box to the left of the comment letter
code.
Repeat this step up to four comments.
3. Press [MEAS]. The next time [SAVE] is pressed these comment codes will be saved
with the thickness at the current ID number.
(See Creating or Editing Comment Tables from the Model 25MULTI PLUS on page
141 for more information.)
Note:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

The comment codes are automatically untagged every time you press
[SAVE]. Therefore, you must select the desired comment code before using
it.

NQT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

6.11

Using the Review ID Mode


The review ID mode has three purposes:

Review datalogger contents by scanning through stored ID locations in the active file.

Move within the database and change the current ID location to any location that
already exists in the database.

Change the current ID location to any location that already exists in the database for
the purposes of editing that ID location.

To review stored thickness values and waveforms or move to an existing id location,


follow these steps:
1. From the Measure mode, press [ID#]. The following data is displayed on the screen:

Current ID Location

Current File Name

Stored Thickness Value

Stored Waveform (if any) with Status Flags (described in figure below)

Stored Comments or Notes

Datalogger Flags: The area composed of four small boxes in the upper right corner of
the waveform area is reserved for status flags describing the displayed stored
thickness values. The flags are the same single letter abbreviations for status words
that are transmitted by the gage using the Sending commands. (See Managing
Communications / Data Transfer on page 157.) The flags that are defined for each box
are described in the figure below.

The Review mode is indicated by ID Review section in the center of the display. An
example is shown in the figure below:

NQU

j~~==a~~

Differential Mode
D-Differential Mode
d -% Differential Mode
Standard Alarm
A-Alarm Mode
H-High Alarm
L-Low Alarm

M-Measurement
LOS- Standard Mode

Percent Previous Mode


p-Alarm Mode
r-Reduction Alarm
g-Growth Alarm
Absolute Previous Alarm Mode
P-Alarm mode
R-Reduction Alarm
G-Growth Alarm

ID Review Screen

1-Mode 1
2-Mode 2
3-Mode 3

m-MIN
M-MAX

Figure 107 Identifying the Review ID Mode

Measurements are disabled in this mode.


2. Press [ ] to display the next ID Location in the datalogger and its stored contents.
3. Press [ ] to display the previous ID Location and its stored contents.You can either
press [ ] and [ ] repeatedly or hold down either key to review the datalogger.
4. Press [2nd F], [ ] to jump to the last ID Location in the file. Press [2nd F], [ ] to
jump the first ID Location in the file.
5. Press [ID#] at any time to edit the displayed ID Location. (See Using the Edit ID Mode
on page 149.)
6. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measure mode with the current ID Location changed
to the ID Location selected in the ID Review mode.
7. Press [2nd F], [MEAS] to return to the Measure mode with the current ID number
unchanged. The current ID Location will be the last active ID Location in the
Measure mode.

6.12

Using the Edit ID Mode


The ID Edit mode is generally used for one of two purposes:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

To change the current ID Location to a different ID Location already in the database.


This mode is useful when using a large database and it would take too long to locate
the desired ID using the [ ] and [ ] keys.

To change the current ID Location to a new ID, which does not yet exist in the
database. This mode is useful when a user wishes to include additional measurement

NQV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

points to the active file. Additional ID Locations can be added anywhere in the
database (beginning, middle, end.)
Note:

No stored data is shown while in ID Edit mode and no measurements can be


made.

To use the ID Edit mode, follow these steps:


1. Press [ID#] from the Measure mode.
The current ID Location, including the stored thickness contents (if any), stored
waveform (if any), and stored comments/notes (if any), are displayed on the ID
Review screen. (See Using the Review ID Mode on page 148.)
2. Use the ID Review mode techniques to select the ID Location to begin editing.
3. To enable the ID Edit mode, press [ID#] key again and the following editing screen
opens:

An editing cursor (reverse video) appears on the first character of the displayed ID
Location, as shown on the above screen. (See Using the Model 25MULTI PLUS
Standard Editing Commands on page 110 for more detail about entering data.)
Choose one of the following three steps to exit editing at any time:
1. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measure mode with the Current ID Location modified
as displayed.
If the edited ID is NOT in the database, the following screen opens:

NRM

j~~==a~~

Figure 108 Example of Screen if Edited ID is Not in the Database

2. Press [

] or [

] to select the Insert, Append, or Cancel option.

The Append option has the edited ID number appended to the end of the file.
The Insert option has the edited ID inserted before the current ID Location.
3. Press [SAVE] with or without an active measurement in order for the edited ID to
become a permanent part of the database. After pressing [SAVE], the sequence
resumes at the previous current ID.
4. Press [ID#] to Return to the ID Review mode with the Displayed ID modified as
edited. The ID Review mode is entered with the ID selected in the Edit mode. If this
number is not in the database, it will be lost when any review key is pressed.
5. Press [2nd F], [MEAS], at any time, to return to the Measure mode without changing
the Current ID Number. This terminates the edit process.

6.13

Erasing Data
Note:

6.13.1

Data erased by the techniques below CANNOT be recovered.

Erasing Data in the Active/Open File


To erase a single measurement, follow these steps:
1. Press [ID#], from the Measure mode, to enter the ID Review mode. The current ID
number is shown with its stored data.
2. Press [ ] and [ ] or the edit keys to change to the ID number to be erased. (See Using
the Edit ID Mode on page 149.)
3. Press [2nd F], [FILE] (Clr Mem) to erase the data at the displayed ID number, the
thickness value, the setup information, and the waveform. The displayed ID number
changes to the next ID number in the sequence following the one erased.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NRN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Note:

To replace a thickness reading it is easier to save a new measurement at the


desired ID from the Measure mode. If you do not want to save a
measurement at a specific ID, press the [SAVE] key from the Measure
mode when you are not taking a measurement. This stores an LOS condition
and -.- at the specific ID number.

4. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measure mode.


Note:

When deleting the ID number in Sequential or Incremental files, the ID


number location are also deleted. In all file types, only the thickness/
waveform is deleted.

To erase a range of measurements, follow these steps:


1. Press [2nd F], [FILE] (CLR MEM) from the Measure mode.
2. Enter the starting range ID and ending range ID.
3. Press [ENTER].
4. Select the Delete or Cancel option and press [Enter].

6.13.2

Erasing a File
See Deleting a File on page 138.

6.13.3

Erasing the Entire Database


Caution: Erasing the entire Database erases all files and data contained in those files. The
datalogger will be completely empty after this procedure.

1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP MODE). The SP Mode menu opens:

Figure 109 Selecting the Resets Option

NRO

j~~==a~~

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Resets option. Press [ENTER]. The following
screen opens:

Figure 110 Selecting the DBase Reset Option

3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the DBase Reset option. Press [ENTER]. The
following screen opens:

Figure 111 Warning Message when Resetting DBase

4. Press [ENTER] to confirm, or press [MEAS] to abort DBASE Reset.

6.14

Using the Optional Bar Code Wand to Enter an ID


Number
Panametrics-NDTTM offers a non-contact Bar Code Wand for the Model 25MULTI PLUS
(Part #36DLP/BCW). The purpose of using a Bar Code Wand is to provide a method for
the gage to automatically edit the current ID number to match that of a bar code label.
To use the Bar Code Wand to enter an ID number, follow these steps:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NRP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

1. Verify the communication parameters are set to the following values:


Baud Rate: 19200
Word Length:8
Parity:

None

Stop Bits:

2. Plug the Panametrics-NDT TM Bar Code Wand into the RS-232 Connector on the
Model 25MULTI PLUS.
3. Scan the Bar Code Wand on the special ID Code Label.
When using the non-contact wand, position the scanner over the bar code label (0.0 2.00"or 0 - 50mm away from the label) and press the trigger button.
The ID number changes to the value coded on the label and the gage returns to the
Measure mode, ready to take a measurement.
4. Press [SAVE] to save a measurement.The current ID number is displayed in the ID
section of the screen (top left).
Note:

6.15

Print labels on medium density 3 of 9 code. Consult Panametrics-NDTTM for


further information on label requirements.

Generating Reports
The Model 25MULTI PLUS is capable of generating inspection data reports from within
the gage without having to connect to a computer or printer. The following reports are
available:

File Summary with Statistics Report

Min/Max Summary

File Comparison Report

To generate a report, follow these steps:


1. Press [FILE]. The File Option menu opens:

Figure 112 Selecting the Reports Option

NRQ

j~~==a~~

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Reports option. Press [ENTER]. The following
menu opens:

Figure 113 Selecting the File Summary with Stats Option

3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the desired report format. Press [ENTER]. Choose
from the following reports:

Summary with Statistics Report

Min/Max Summary

File Compression.

If you select the Summary with Statistics Report option, the File Summary w/ Stats
screen opens.

Figure 114 Selecting a File to View

1. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the desired file name.


2. Press [ENTER] to view the statistics.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NRR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

If you select the Min/Max Summary option, the following screen opens.

Figure 115 Viewing File if Min/Max Summary is Selected

1. Press [ ] and [ ] to select the file and press [ENTER]. The minimum and maximum
thickness location will be displayed.
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to slew through the minimum thickness location.
3. Press [ENTER] to highlight the maximum thickness locations.
4. Press [ ] and [ ] to slew through the maximum thickness location.
5. Press [2nd F], [ ] or [2nd F], [ ] to move between File Select, Min Thickness, and
Maximum Thickness.
If File Comparison Report is chosen the following screen opens.

Figure 116 Viewing File if File Comparison is Selected

1. Press [ ] and [ ] to select the Reference file (original file) and press [ENTER].
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to select the Comparison file (latest file).
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to slew through the Maximum Thickness Loss ID Location.
4. Press [ENTER] and [ ] to slew through the Growth ID Locations.

NRS

j~~=`~=L=a~~=q~

Managing Communications / Data


Transfer
This section describes how the Model 25MULTI PLUS can communicate with a
computer or printer in order to send or receive files.
Topics are as follows:

7.1

Transmitting Data to a Computer or Printer

Receiving (Downloading) Files from a Computer

Uploading/Downloading a Stored Transducer Setup to a Computer

Setting up Serial Communications

Identifying Data Output Formats

Performing Datalogger and Communication Resets

Using the Optional WIN25DL PLUS Interface Program

Transmitting Data to a Computer or Printer


This procedure is normally done after you take measurements from all desired locations.
Once data is transmitted from the Model 25MULTI PLUS it remains in memory for later
use, or until you clear the data. Therefore, if any errors occur while transmitting data it can
be sent again.
Before proceeding with any of the operations described in the sections below:

Confirm that the receiving device is connected and configured properly. See the
following sections of this manual starting on page 163, page 193, and page 195. Also,
refer to the operators manuals for the receiving device and for the receiving software.
We recommend using the optional Panametrics-NDTTM WIN25DL PLUS Interface
Program with the gage to take advantage of all the datalogging features.

Confirm that the communications parameters on the Model 25MULTI PLUS are set
identical to those on the computer or printer.

Note:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

The Model 25MULTI PLUS can send data to any device capable of
receiving ASCII formatted data using the RS-232C/D protocol. This
includes personal computers, minicomputers, dataloggers, and printers. The
data cable must be compatible with the Model 25MULTI PLUS output
connector and the serial input connector of the receiving device.
Panametrics-NDT supplies cables for IBM compatible PCs and serial
printers and provide assistance with connecting any other equipment. See
Appendix C - Serial Interface on page 193.

NRT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Note:

7.1.1

When communicating directly to a printer the Model 25MULTI PLUS will


only work with serial printers.

Sending Entire Files: Data Transfer from Gage to Computer or Printer


You can send single or multiple files from the Model 25MULTI PLUS datalogger. Data
that is transmitted includes File Name, File Header, ID Numbers, Thickness Data, Flags,
Calibration Setups, and Comments.
To send entire files from the Model 25MULTI PLUS to a computer or printer, follow
these steps:
1. From the Measure mode press [FILE]. The File Options menu opens:

Figure 117 Selecting the Send Option from the File Menu

2. Press [ ] and [ ] until the Send option is highlighted. Press [ENTER]. The File Send
screen opens:

Figure 118 Selecting a File to Send

3. Press [

NRU

] and [

] to select All or Selected. Press [ENTER].

j~~=`~=L=a~~=q~

Choosing All sends all of the files in the Model 25MULTI PLUS to the connected
device. If you choose All:
a. Send is highlighted.
b. Press [ENTER].
c. After confirming the send function, the Model 25MULTI PLUS begins
transmitting all files in the database.

Choosing Selected lets you choose which specific files in the datalogger you want
to send to the connected device. If you choose Selected:
a. The first file in the list is highlighted.
b. Press [ENTER] to transmit the file. A * appears, tagging the file. Press
[ENTER] again to un-tag the file if you do not want to select it.
c. Press [ ] and [ ] until the next desired file name is highlighted.
d. Press [ENTER]. Continue this procedure until all desired files are tagged.
e. Press [2nd F], [ ] when finished to highlight Send.
f. Press [ENTER] to complete sending the tagged files.

7.1.2

Sending a Specific Range of ID Numbers from a Specific File


This feature is useful when you need to transmit only a portion of a given file to a computer
or printer.
To send a specific range of ID numbers from a specific file, follow these steps:
1. Open the file that contains the data to be transmitted, if the desired file is not already
the active file. See Opening a File on page 135.
2. Press and hold [SEND], from the Measure mode, until the ID -Range Send screen
opens.

Figure 119 Identifying a Range of ID Numbers to Send

3. Use the gages editing functions to set the starting ID of the desired range of ID
numbers. Press [ENTER].

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NRV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

4. Use the gages editing functions to set the ending ID of the desired range of ID
numbers. Press [ENTER].
Send is highlighted.

5. Press [ENTER]. The gage transmits the specified range.

7.1.3

Performing a Single Send of the Current Displayed Measurement


Data to a Computer or Printer
This procedure is used for transmitting the current displayed measurement data only with
its appropriate setup flags. The current ID number is not transmitted. This feature is useful
when the Model 25MULTI PLUS is continuously connected to an external device
(printer, data collector, computer) and you need to collect only data on command.
To perform a single send, follow these steps:
1. Set up the desired Measure mode on the Model 25MULTI PLUS.
2. Make a thickness reading.
3. Press [SEND] quickly (release in less than one second).
Only the displayed measurement data with its appropriate setup flags is transmitted
and the gage will return to the original Measure mode. The specific data transmitted
depends on the datalogger output format. (See Identifying Data Output Formats on
page 165.) Pressing [SEND] while the thickness display is blank sends .- and
the displayed flags.
Note:

7.1.4

Sending a displayed reading will blank a held reading, reset the minimum or
maximum function, and release a frozen waveform.

Sending a Snapshot of the Model 25MULTI PLUS Display to a


Computer (using the optional WIN25DL PLUS Interface Program)
With this function , you can send the entire Model 25MULTI PLUS display to the optional
WIN25DL Interface Program on a windows-based PC. This is useful when you need an
exact replica of the display for reporting or documentation purposes.
To send a snapshot of the Model 25MULTI PLUS display to a computer, follow these
steps:
1. Set up the desired Measure mode and waveform screen format on the Model
25MULTI PLUS.
2. Select Snap Shot from the Program Options in the WIN25DL PLUS Interface
Program. See the WIN25DL PLUS instruction manual for details.
3. Make a thickness reading or recall a reading from memory.
4. Press [2nd F], [SEND] (PRINT).
The displayed screen is transmitted to the computer.

NSM

j~~=`~=L=a~~=q~

7.1.5

Sending a Snapshot of the Model 25MULTI PLUS Display to a Printer


With this function, you can send the entire Model 25MULTI PLUS display to a
compatible graphics printer. This feature is useful when an exact replica of the display is
needed for reporting or documentation purposes. This procedure describes how to save a
snapshot of the screen to a printer.
Note:

Any waveform sent to a printer using the [SEND] key only, described from
page 158 to page 161, does not print as a graphic. Instead, the waveform data
prints in an encoded non-readable format.

To Print Waveforms on a printer, follow these steps:


1. Set up the desired Measure mode and waveform screen format on the Model
25MULTI PLUS.
2. Verify that the Model 25MULTI PLUS is properly connected to the printer.
3. Make a thickness reading or recall a reading from memory.
4. Press [2nd F], [SEND] (PRINT).
The displayed screen is transmitted to the printer.
Note:

7.2

A compatible portable printer is available from Panametrics-NDTTM (part


number 36PR.)

Receiving (Downloading) Files from a Computer


The same type of datalogger information, which you can send to a computer, can also be
received or downloaded from a computer into the gage. This has two benefits:

Retrieve thickness survey data, previously saved with ID numbers and stored in a
computer file, to the gage months or years later at the next survey date. Use this
retrieved data for three purposes:

Guides you through the measurement sequence using the ID numbers.

Compare current values, at the measurement site, with previous thickness values.

Use the previous survey setup data to manually or automatically verify that the
current measurement setup identical.

Create ID number sequences in a computer and then download to the gage. This
externally created sequence can guide you through the prescribed measurement
location path. The ID sequence created in the computer must have setup information.
The setup can be the gage default setup or any other desired sequence of setups.
The data downloaded to the Model 25MULTI PLUS gage must be in the same precise
format in which data is transmitted. Panametrics-NDT TM recommends using the
optional WIN25DL PLUS Interface Program to handle all functions of interfacing,
storing, and creating Model 25MULTI PLUS data. Other database and editor software
may work, but depends on the software design functionality. Please contact

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NSN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Panametrics-NDTTM for information on additional software data management


programs.
To Download a Data file to the Gage
1. Confirm that the transmitting device is connected and configured properly. See
Setting up Communication Parameters on page 163 and See Appendix C - Serial
Interface on page 193. Also refer to the operators manuals for the transmitting device
and for transmitting software.
2. Confirm that the communications parameters on the Model 25MULTI PLUS are
identical to those on the computer.
3. Power on the Model 25MULTI PLUS and make sure it is in the standard startup or
measure screen.
4. Begin sending formatted data from the computer. The Model 25MULTI PLUS
displays a Receiving Data screen while the data is sent. This screen disappears after
the Model 25MULTI PLUS is finished receiving data.
5. When all the transmitted data is received, the gage returns to the Measure screen.
Review the new gage database for accuracy.

7.3

Uploading/Downloading a Stored Transducer Setup


to a Computer
The Model 25MULTI PLUS can store up to 35 custom user defined Transducers Setups.
Send these Transducer Setups to the optional WIN25DL PLUS interface program,
allowing you to save a copy of all Transducer setups on the computer. You can also send
these Transducer Setups back to the Model 25MULTI PLUS. This feature is very useful to
setup multiple Model 25MULTI PLUS gages with the same Custom transducer setup.

7.4

Setting up Serial Communications


The Model 25MULTI PLUS can transmit stored data and displayed readings over its I/O
(Input/Output) RS-232 cable to any device with an RS-232 serial interface connector. The
Model 25MULTI PLUS can also receive and execute commands sent from any device
with a serial interface. Such devices include personal computers and printers. See
Appendix E - Remote Control Via RS-232 on page 223 for a detailed list of Remote
Control Commands.
In order to enable the Model 25MULTI PLUS to communicate with another device, you
must use the correct cable and the same communication parameters must be set into the
gage and the other device. These topics are discussed in the next two sections.

7.4.1

Defining RS-232 Cables


The Model 25MULTI PLUS must be connected to the computer with the proper cable.
Since all computers do not have the same serial port connector, the correct cable must be

NSO

j~~=`~=L=a~~=q~

ordered from Panametrics-NDTTM. One RS-232 cable is included with every Model
25MULTI PLUS, which you can specify at the time of order.
Panametrics-NDT offers the following cables that are compatible with most computer and
printer serial connectors:

7.4.2

I/O Cable
Part #

Computer Serial Port


Connector Description

Cable
Length

Typical
Device

36DLC/9F-6

D Type, 9 male (pin)


contacts

6 ft. (2M)

IBM or compatible AT
or PS2-30 computer

36DLC/25F-6

D Type, 25 male (pin)


contacts

6 ft. (2M)

PC, PC-X, and PS-2


type computers, some
serial printers

36DLC/25M-6

D Type, 25 female

6 ft. (2M)

Other computers
(socket) contacts and
serial printers

36DLC/9M/PR-6

D Type, 25 female

6 ft. (2M)

Portable Printer

Table 8

Computer or Printer Serial Port

Note:

Even matching cables and connectors do not guarantee compatibility. To


verify that a particular device serial port connector is compatible with Model
25MULTI PLUS cable, compare the wiring information in Appendix C with
the serial port wiring information given in the operators manual for the
remote device. If there is a wiring compatibility problem, sometimes
software or hardware switches may be set to change the connections.
Otherwise, Panametrics-NDT may be able to supply a special cable for the
application.

Setting up Communication Parameters


The Model 25MULTI PLUS communication parameters must match the configuration of
the computer.
To set up the communication parameters, follow these steps:
1. Determine the settings used in the receiving device for the following:
Baud Rate:

(1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200)

Number of Stop Bits: (1 or 2)


Parity Bit:

(None, Odd, or Even)

2. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP MODE). The SP Mode menu opens.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NSP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Figure 120 Selecting the Communication Option from the SP Mode Menu

3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Communication option. Press [ENTER]. The


following menu opens:

Figure 121 Viewing Communication Parameters

The current communication parameters will be displayed. The setting options for each
parameter is as follows:
Baud Rate:

(1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, or 19200)

Number of Stop Bits:(1 or 2)


Parity Bit:

(None, Odd, or Even)

Comm Protocol:

(Single or Multiple)

DBASE Tracking: (On/Off) (See Performing DBase Tracking on page 84)


Output Format:

(F1, F2, F3, F4, or F5) (See Identifying Data Output


Formats on page 165)

4. Press [ ] and [ ] to change any of the parameters until the desired parameter is
highlighted. Press [ ] or [ ] to change the setting of that parameter.

NSQ

j~~=`~=L=a~~=q~

5. Highlight the Previous Screen option. Press [ENTER] to exit this mode, or press
[MEAS] to go directly back to the Measure mode with the new parameters set.

7.5

Identifying Data Output Formats


There are 10 available formats for the transmitted data. A general description of each is
given in Table 9 on page 165:

Format

File
ID
Thickness WaveHeader Header
Table
forms

F-1

F-2

F-3

Setup Appsetup
Statistics
Table
Table

Note
Table

F-4
F-5

F-6

F-7

F-8

F-9

F-10

X
X

Note: The Model 25MULTI PLUS has 10 output formats. F-7 to F-10 are 26DL PLUS compatible
formats

Table 9

Model 25MULTI PLUS Output Formats

To view the current format and/or change it, proceed as follows:


1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP MODE).
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Communication option. Press [ENTER]. The
following menu opens:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NSR

Figure 122 Viewing the Communication Parameters

The current communication parameters are displayed. The settings for the current
output format is shown on the last line if this menu.
Output Format (F1 to F10)
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to change the output format until the output format is highlighted.
Press [ ] or [ ] to change the setting.
4. Highlight the Previous Screen option. Press [ENTER] to exit this mode, or press
[MEAS] to go directly back to the Measure mode with the new parameters set.

7.6

Performing Datalogger and Communication Resets


Quickly reset the gage to factory default conditions by using one of two resets in the
Model 25MULTI PLUS.

Communication Reset: Resets communication parameters to the following default


conditions:
Baud Rate:

19200

Stop Bits:

Parity:

None

Comm Protocol:

Multiple

Output Format:

F1

Continuous Output: OFF


DBase Tracking:

OFF

DBASE Reset: Potentially very dangerous and must be used with caution.

Caution: This function erases any and all data in the Model 25MULTI PLUS datalogger.
Only use this reset when there is no future need of the data stored in the datalogger. There
is no way to recover data once this reset has been performed.

166

Model 25MULTI PLUS

j~~=`~=L=a~~=q~

Note:

7.6.1

If the data was previously sent to a computer, you can reload the data to the
Model 25MULTI PLUS at any time.

Performing a Communication Reset


1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP MODE). The SP Mode menu opens.

Figure 123 Selecting the Resets Option from the SP Mode Menu

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Resets option. Press [ENTER]. The following
menu opens:

Figure 124 Selecting Communications Reset

3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Communication Reset option. Press [ENTER].


The reset is now complete and the gage returns to the Setup menu.
4. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measure mode.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NST

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Note:

7.6.2

If you press [MEAS] at any time before the final press of [ENTER] in Step
3, the gage will return to the Measure mode without performing the reset.

Performing a DBase Reset


Caution: This function erases any and all data in the Model 25MULTI PLUS datalogger.
Only use this reset when there is no future need of the data stored in the datalogger. There
is no way to recover data once this reset has been performed.
Note:

If the data was previously sent to a computer, you can reload the data to the
Model 25MULTI PLUS at any time.

To perform a DBase Reset, follow these steps:


1. Press [2nd F], [0] (SP MODE). The SP Mode menu opens.

Figure 125 Selecting the Resets Option from the SP Mode Menu

2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Resets option. Press [ENTER]. The following
menu opens:

Figure 126 Selecting DBase Reset

NSU

j~~=`~=L=a~~=q~

3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the DBASE Reset option. Press [ENTER]. The
following message appears asking to confirm the reset.

Figure 127 Confirming DBase Reset

4. Press [ENTER] to confirm deleting the entire database.


The reset is now complete and the gage returns to the SP Mode menu.
5. Press [MEAS] to return to the Measure mode.
Note:

7.7

If you press [MEAS] at any time before the final press of [ENTER] in Step
3, the gage will return to the Measure mode without performing the reset.

Using the Optional WIN25DL PLUS Interface


Program
WIN25DL PLUS is the interface program for the Model 25MULTI PLUS. WIN25DL
PLUS is a windows-based interface program, compatible with Windows 95, 98, ME,
2000 or NT. This program provides the capability to create inspection database files,
upload and download data files, and generate reports. WIN25DL PLUS is compatible
with Model 25MULTI PLUS data files. The program offers advanced ODBC
compatibility and enhanced OLE features. For more details refer to the WIN25DL PLUS
instruction manual (part number 910-222), or contact Panametrics-NDTTM.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NSV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

NTM

j~~=~=q==j=ORjriqf=mirp

Maintaining and Troubleshooting the


Model 25MULTI PLUS
This section describes how to maintain your Model 25MULTI PLUS by applying routing
care and maintenance. Also, this section describes many troubleshooting ideas for
common problems you may encounter.
Topics are as follows:

8.1

Providing Routine Gage Maintenance

Maintaining Transducers

Understanding Error Messages

Resolving Battery and Charger Problems

Resolving Measurement Problems

Performing Diagnostic Self Tests

Getting Help

Providing Routine Gage Maintenance


The Model 25MULTI PLUS case is sealed to prevent intrusion of environmental liquids
and dust. However, it is not completely waterproof. Therefore, the unit should never be
immersed in any fluid. Use the rubber plug that comes with the unit to protect the I/O
connector and charger connector from contamination, particularly in areas where airborne
dust and aerosols are present. Use the protective pouch to provide shock and scratch
protection.
The Model 25MULTI PLUS case is designed to withstand normal field use. However, it
is an electronic instrument, and damage is possible if not handled with some care.
Observe the following instructions in particular:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Never press a key with a hard or sharp object

When connecting cables to the gage, first align the connector with the mating
receptacle on the gage (the transducer connector pin is down, the RS-232 I/O cable
key tab facing up and the charger half-moon facing down), then carefully insert the
connector straight into the receptacle

When removing cables from the gage, first grasp the connector (not the cable), then
gently pull out from the gage

Do not throw or intentionally drop the gage.

Do not use strong solvents or abrasives (clean the protective pouch, case keypad, and
display windows with a damp cloth and mild detergent, if necessary)

NTN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

8.2

Maintaining Transducers
The ultrasonic transducers or probes used with the Model 25MULTI PLUS are rugged
devices that need little care. They are not indestructible, however, and some attention to
the following items result in a maximum life span.

8.3

Make high temperature measurements only with designated high temperature


transducers. Surfaces hotter than approximately 125F/50C damage or destroy
standard tranducers if contact is made.

Cutting, pinching, or pulling the cables causes damage to the cables. Be careful to
prevent mechanical abuse to the cables. Never leave a transducer where a heavy object
can be placed on the cable. Never remove a transducer from the gage by pulling on the
cable; pull on the molded connector only. Never tie a knot in the transducer cable. Do
not twist or pull the cable at the point where it connects to the transducer.

Excessive wear at the tip of the Transducer degrades its performance. To minimize
wear, do not scrape or drag the transducer across rough surfaces. Operating the
transducer may become erratic or impossible when a transducer tip becomes rough or
cracked. Although some wear is normal, severe wear limits transducer life. Take
particular care with delay line transducers, which have plastic delay lines; replace
delay lines when worn.

Understanding Error Messages


When operating the gage, certain error messages may appear. Usually these messages
indicate a problem with the operating procedure, but some may indicate a physical
problem with the gage itself. If you do not understand an error message, call PanametricsNDTTM for assistance.

8.4

Resolving Battery and Charger Problems


The battery life percent indicator in the lower right corner of the display shows the
percentage of operating time remaining. When the battery charge reaches about 2%, the
gage automatically powers off. If the gage powers off immediately after powering on, or
if it does not power on at all, then the battery is probably completely discharged.
If after recharging the battery (See Replacing the Battery Pack on page 30), the gage runs
only when the charger is connected, then you may need to replace the battery. Note, the
battery should last through several hundred discharge-recharge cycles before failing.
Remember that the battery charge indicator shows remaining operating time only when
the charger is not connected. Do not use the charge indicator to determine when a charging
battery has reached full charge. A battery must be charged 2 hours to completely restore
full capacity.
If the unit does not switch on even after the charger is connected for several minutes, then
either the gage itself or the charger requires service.
See page 29 to page 30 for more information.

NTO

j~~=~=q==j=ORjriqf=mirp

8.5

Resolving Measurement Problems


Symptom:

No or low echoes, no measurement (LOS)


Possible Explanation:

Insufficient couplant, especially on rough or curved surfaces

Gain set too low

Material is too attenuating or surfaces are not parallel or are too rough

Gage requires service; first try Master Reset, do pulser/receiver test

Symptom:

Good echoes, no measurements


Possible Explanation:

Gage problem; perform hard status, hardware control diagnostic

Symptom:

Good echoes, incorrect measurements


Possible Explanation:

8.6

Not in calibration; perform calibration

Differential mode - check Diff flag, press [2nd F] [9] (DIFF)

Min or Max mode - see page 65 or page 66

Material is too grainy, has flaws, inclusions or laminations, or very high surface noise;
try gain optimization, manual gain adjust or extended blank

Performing Diagnostic Self Tests


To aid in localizing a suspected hardware problem or simply to verify correct hardware
operation, several tests can be performed from the keypad.

Keypad Test

Video Display Test

Hardware Status

Error Status

To select any of the above diagnostics, follow these steps:


1. Press [2nd F] [0] (SP MODE).
2. Press [ ] key to highlight the Diagnostics option. Press [ENTER].

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NTP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

3. Press [ ] or [ ] to highlight the Diagnostic you want to perform. Press [ENTER].

8.6.1

Performing a Keypad Test


To perform a Keypad Test, follow these steps:
1. Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Keypad option. Press [ENTER]. A replica of the keypad
appears on the display.
2. Test any key by pressing it. If that specific key is working correctly, then the gage
beeps and that key is highlighted on the display.
Note:

8.6.2

The [ON/OFF] key powers off the gage and the [ENTER] key exits the
Keypad Test mode.

Performing a Video Display Test


To perform a Video Display Test, do the following:
Press [ ] or [ ] to select the Video option. Press [ENTER]. This test displays a
darkened rectangle, which decreases in size.
If at any time a break appears in the pattern, then there is a problem with the waveform
display. Otherwise, the video display is operating normally.

8.6.3

Viewing the Hardware Status


To view the hardware status, do the following:
Press [ ] or [ ] to select Hardware Status and the following screen opens:

Figure 128 Viewing the Hardware Status Screen

NTQ

j~~=~=q==j=ORjriqf=mirp

The items shown on the screen above are:


SW Revision:

Displays revision of application and monitor software installed in gage.


SW Revision: Application/monitor
Application: Main software that controls all gage operating functions.
Monitor (also known as Boot Loader): Controls gage's simplest I/O, display, keypad,
and power management functions independent of the application. The primary
purpose is to load application software onto the gage.
V1: V1:

Displays values of the power supply voltages V1 and V1 measured when the gage is
powered on. Indicates whether voltages are within specification via a <Pass> or <Fail>
message.
Specification: V1 = 5V 0.2 V

V2 = -5V 0.2 V

DC Gain:

Displays measured value of the RF section's DC Gain at the Min, Mid, and Max dB
settings. This measurement approximates the full bandwidth gain (DC - 20 MHz). Test
indicates whether all gains are within specification via a <Pass> or <Fail> message.
Calibration performed when gage is powered on.
Specification: Min setting 17 to 21 dB

Mid setting 37 to 41 dB
Max setting 76 to 81 dB
Blank Cal, Detector Cal, Sampler Cal:

Displays measured values of hardware time delays in 70MHz clock counts. Test indicates
whether delays are within specification via a <Pass> or <Fail> message. Calibrations
performed when gage is powered on.
Specification: Blank Cal: 64 to 96 counts (67 nominal)
Detector Cal: 70 nominal
Sampler Cal:

70 nominal

Threshold Cal, Offset1 Cal, Offset2 Cal, Flash ADC Cal:

Displays values of DAC settings used to center the RF input signal at the midpoint of the
analog-to-digital converter's input range (+2VDC). Values apply across full 80 dB gain
range. Calibration performed when gage is powered on.
Specification: DACs attempt to compensate for DC offset at 0, 40 and 80 dB. A
<Fail> condition occurs after four attempts if error > 1 count of the analog-to-digital
converter (~ 7.8 mV).
Battery:

Displays value of the battery voltage measured when gage is turned on and charger is not
connected. A <Pass> or <Fail> message is not included because the gage will not power
on during the <Fail> condition.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NTR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Specification: Battery = approximately 5.8V to 8V


RAM BANKs 1, 2, and 3:

Displays which of the 1.024 M Byte RAM Banks are installed.

8.6.4

Viewing the Error Status


To view the Error Status, do the following:
Press [2nd F] [0] (SP Mode) to select the Error Status option. This displays an error
log.

8.7

Getting Help
Application, sales or problem solving assistance is available directly from PanametricsNDTTM Customer Service.
Panametrics-NDT will repair any Model 25MULTI PLUS gage at its Waltham,
Massachusetts, USA factory. In addition, some local Panametrics-NDT dealers and
agents are able to do repairs at customer sites or at their own facilities.
Replacement parts and accessories for the Model 25MULTI PLUS are available from
Panametrics-NDT. See Appendix F - Accessories and Replacement Parts on page 231.

NTS

^=^=J=q~=p~

Appendix A - Technical Specifications


Packaging

Case Material

High impact Lexan.

Size

9.375 H x 5.45 W x 1.5 T inch.


238 H x 138 W x 38 T mm.

Weight

2.1 lbs.

Connectors

Transducer: One size 0 on 0.54 inch (13.7 mm).


All environmentally sealed RS-232: Sealed 6-pin
Lemo style.
Charger: Sealed 4-pin Lemo style.

Hand Strap

Soft leather with adjustable velcro closure.

Temperature

Operating: +14 F TO 122 F (-10 C to +50 C).

Case

Splash proof.

Battery

Internal rechargeable NiCad battery pack. Rated at


6V @ 1800 mAHr or Disposable Alkaline 6 AA
cell.

Operating Time Per


Charge

25 hours minimum in Mode 1 at 4Hz with


backlight off.

Charger

External wall plug-in charger for Universal


Supply (100VAC, 115VAC, and 230VAC) input.
Charge time 2 Hours.

Keyboard

Sealed and embossed membrane surface.


Tactile and audible feedback.
Color coded graphics.
30 keys of 5 rows and 6 columns.

Power

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NTT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Display

Physical

Graphics super twisted nematic liquid crystal


display.
Module Size: 114mm (W) x 100mm (H) x 14mm
(T).
Viewing area: 102mm (W) x 86mm (H).
Dots:

240 (W) x 200 (H).

Dot Size:

0.36mm x 0.36mm.

Color:

Dark blue image on natural


background.

Backlight

Electroluminescent backlight for viewing in low


ambient light condition. User selectable on or off.

Information
Displayed

A-Scan echo waveform with graticule of


amplitude vs. thickness axis.
Waveform area: 200 (W) x94(H) dots.
Waveform Status Flags:
F: Frozen
H: Held
Z: Zoomed
M: from datalogger memory
File name, ID number, stored value, and setup
stored at ID numbers.
Stored data flags.

NTU

^=^=J=q~=p~

Measurement

Box 1:

Normal

Box 2:

Differential Mode

Percentage Differential

Alarm Mode (Standard Alarm)

High Alarm (Standard Alarm)

Low Alarm (Standard Alarm)

Alarm mode (Percent Previous Mode)

Reduction Alarm (Percent Previous Mode)

Growth Alarm (Percent Previous Mode)

Alarm Mode (Absolute Previous Alarm Mode)

Reduction Alarm (Absolute Previous Alarm Mode)

Growth Alarm (Absolute Previous Alarm Mode)

Measure Mode 1

Measure Mode 2

Measure Mode 3

Maximum Value

Minimum Value

Box 3:

Box 4:

LOS

Measurement values, Calibration values,


Measurement flags
Measurement Values
Number of digits 5
Digit height 0.425"
Measurement units and flags
IN or MM (Thickness)
IN/uSec or MM/uSec (Velocity)
Measurement Mode
Flag
Update Rate

MIN flag (Minimum mode)


MAX flag (Maximum mode)
Table 10

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Information Displayed on the Model 25MULTI PLUS Screen

NTV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Measurement

LOS

DIFF flag (Differential mode)


ALRM flag (Alarm mode)
CAL flag (Calibration mode)
CAL LOCK flag (Calibration Lock)
LOS flag (Loss Of Signal or Coupling)
Table 10

Information Displayed on the Model 25MULTI PLUS Screen (Continued)

Measurement

Performance

Pitch and catch using Single, Delay, and


Immersion.

Mode

Mode 1: Time interval measurement from


the main excitation pulse to the first
detected echo.
Mode 2: Time interval measurement from
the interface echo to the first backwall echo.
Mode 3: Time interval between multiple
backwall echoes.

Thickness
Range

The range of thickness capable of being


measured depends on the Setup selected, the
measured material, and the transducer type
being used. Detailed ranges for each
standard setup are specified in Table 12 on
page 187.
In general, selection of the proper setup will
allow thickness measurements over the
following ranges:
Steel:

0.006 to 20.000" 0.15 to


508.00mm

Plastic: 0.003 to 2.000"


50.80mm

Measurement
Resolution

NUM

0.080 to

Selectable from the keypad


LOW: 0.01".
0.1mm
STD: 0.001"
0.01mm
HIGH: 0.0001"
0.001mm

^=^=J=q~=p~

Measurement
Display Update
Rate

Selectable from the keypad:


4, 8, 12, 16, 20 measurements per second,
averaging, or averaging with Quality Bar.
Averaging is a running average of 5
measurements at the update rate.

Material
Velocity Range

0.0200 in/sec to .66929 in/sec.


0.5080 mm/sec to 17.0000 mm/sec.

Material
Velocity
Resolution

.00001 in/sec or .0001 mm/sec.

Zero Cal Range

0.00 to 999.99 zero counts.

Differential Ref.
Range

0.0 to 20.000" or 508.00mm.

Differential Ref.
Resolution

Same as current gage resolution.

Alarm Setpoints
Range

0.0 to 20.000" or 508.00mm.

Alarm Setpoints
Resolution

Same as current gage resolution.

Datalogger

Information
Stored

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

ID number
Thickness value
Unit
LOS/Measurement condition
Differential mode, Differential
Reference value
Alarm mode, Low and Hi alarm
reference values
Minimum/Maximum reading
Velocity value
Transducer type
Waveform image (A-Scan, if selected)
Comments
Source: Downloaded or stored

NUN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

NUO

Storage
Capacity

Storage capacity of the gage depends on the


file type.
Incremental or Sequential Files:
18,000 measurements without waveforms
or 1,700 measurements with waveforms.
Expandible:
Memory Upgrade 1: 36,000 Thickness
3,400 Waveforms
Memory Upgrade 2: 54,000Thickness
5,100 Waveforms

Identification
Number

Size: 1 to 16 characters
Character Set: 0 thru 9, A thru Z, * # : , / . space

Data Base
Structure

DOS compatible file structure:


File Name: 8 characters, DOS compatible.
Number Of Files: Limited by available
memory.
Size Of File: Limited by available memory.

File Creator
(Matrix Maker)

Incremental
Sequential (Defined by Starting and Ending
ID#)
Sequential with custom points
2-D Grid
2-D Grid with custom points
3-D Grid
3-D Custom

File Utilities

Open
Create
Copy
Delete
Send
Edit-Rename
Note-Copy
Reports:
File summary with Statistics
Min/Max Summary
File comparisons

^=^=J=q~=p~

File Output
Format

Ten selectable output formats:


F1 - File Header, ID Header, Thickness
Table, Waveforms, Setup Table, and Note
Table
F2 - File Header, ID Header, Thickness
Table, Setup Table, and Note Table
F3 - ID Header, Thickness Table,
Waveforms, Setup Table, Transducer Setup
Table, and Note Table
F4 - Thickness Table
F5 - ID Header, Thickness Table, and Setup
Table
F6 - Thickness Table, Waveforms, Setup
Table, Transducer Setup Table, and
Statistics
F7 - 26DL PLUS format 16, Thickness
Table, Waveforms, Setup Table, and Note
Table
F8 - 26DL PLUS format 16 Character,
Thickness Table, Setup, and Note Table
F9 -26DL PLUS format 12 Character, ID
Header, Thickness Table, Waveforms, and
Setup Table
F10 - 26DL PLUS format 12 Character, ID
Header, Thickness Table, and Setup Table.

Features

Erase any portion of the file or the entire file.


Print reading and waveform (EPSON
graphics).
Send reading in different format.
Insert and/or append ID numbers.

Communication

Protocol:
Baud:
Word Length:
Stop Bits:
Parity:

Serial RS232 with +/-4V


signal levels. Full duplex.
1200, 2400, 4800, 9600,
19200
8
1 or 2
Even, Odd, or None

Agency
Approval

CE.

Units

The measurement units are keypad


selectable as either inches or millimeters.

Functions

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NUP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Resolution

The measurement resolution is selectable


among high, standard, and low resolution
from the keypad:
High:
.0001" (.001mm)
Standard: .001" (.01mm)
Low:
.01" (.1mm)

Echo Detection
Methods

The following are selected as part of the


Application Setup.
Mode 1: Time between excitation pulse and
first echo following blank period using
contact transducers.
Mode 2: Time between the interface echo
and the first backwall echo. Normally used
with delay line or immersion transducers.
Mode 3: Time between a pair of backwall
echoes following the interface echo.
Normally used with delay line or immersion
transducers.

MeasType

Standard: Precision time measurement


between two successive echoes.
Barrier Layer: Advance mathematical
algorithms to separate and measure the time
between echoes from both sides of a thin
barrier layer material. Used in mode 1 and 2.

NUQ

Min Mode

Current thickness is displayed during


transducer contact and the minimum
thickness measured is displayed during
LOS.

Max Mode

Current thickness is displayed during


transducer contact and the maximum
thickness measured is displayed during
LOS.

Hold/blank

The thickness display during LOS may be


set to either HOLD the last reading during
LOS or BLANK the display during LOS.

Differential

The thickness display may be set to display


either actual measured thickness or the
difference between the measured thickness
and a user-set Differential Thickness
Reference Value. The default is a Diff.
Ref. Value of 0.000 and Diff Measure
mode OFF.

^=^=J=q~=p~

Alarm

The gage may be set to indicate visually and


audibly whenever the measured thickness is
less than a user-set Low Alarm value or
greater than a user-set High Alarm
value.The default is Low Alarm value =
0.000, High Alarm value = full scale, and
Alarm Measure mode OFF.

Calibration

View and/or set the material velocity by pressing [VEL] from the Measure
mode, or by selecting MatlVel from the Setup Parameter List.
View and/or set the Zero Calibration by pressing [ZERO] from the Measure
mode, or by selecting Zero from the Setup Parameter List.
Preform the Velocity and/or Zero Calibration by entering the known
thickness(es) of test block(s) while measuring the block(s).
Application Setups

Application Setups are a set of stored configurations of the gage parameters for
various measurement applications. Setups are optimized for such application
features as material, thickness range, and required accuracy or resolution.
When the gage is turned on, the last Setup used is automatically selected and
the gage is ready to make similar measurements.
If the application has changed, choose an Application Setup name based on the
new application (refer to Table 11 on page 185).
Note:

A transducer of the type specified for the selected setup should be plugged
into the gage.

Setup Name

Probe Type

Typical Application

DEFM1-20.0/M116

M116

Steel: 0.020 - 1.5" (0.250 - 38mm)


Plastic: 0.010" min. (0.13mm min.)

DEFM1-10.0/M112

M112

Steel: 0.030 - 10.000" (0.76 - 250mm)


Plastic: 0.010" min. (0.38mm min.)

DEFM1-5.0/M110

M110

Steel: 0.040 - 15" (1.00 - 380mm)


Plastic: 0.025" min. (0.50mm min.)

DEFM1-5.0/M109

M109

Steel: 0.050 - 20" (1.00 - 500mm)


Plastic: 0.025" min. (0.50mm min.)

Table 11

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Setup Name and Application

NUR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Setup Name

Probe Type

Typical Application

DEFM1-2.25/M106

M106

Steel: 0.080 - 20" (2.00 - 500mm)


Plastic: 0.050" min. (1.00mm min.)

DEFM1-10.0/M1016

M1016

Steel: 0.030 - 1.5" (0.76 - 38mm)


Plastic: 0.010" min. (1.00mm min.)

DEFM1-2.25/M1036

M1036

Steel: 0.080 -10.00" (2.0 - 250mm)

DEFM2-20.0/M208

M208

Steel: 0.008 - 0.2" (0.20 - 5mm)

DEFM3-20.0/M208

M208

Steel: 0.008 - 0.200" (0.25 - 5mm)

DEFP2-20.0/M208

M208

Plastic: 0.005 - 0.2" (0.12 - 5mm)

DEFM2-10.0/M202

M202

Steel: 0.060 - 0.5" (1.50 - 12mm)

DEFM3-10.0/M202

M202

Steel: 0.010 - 0.500" (0.25 - 12mm)

DEFP2-10.0/M202

M202

Plastic: 0.050 - 0.400" (1.25 - 10mm)

DEFP2-5.0/M205

M205

Plastic: 0.050-0.400" (1.25 - 10mm)

DEFP2-15.0/V260

V260

Plastic: 0.010 - 0.250" (0.25 - 6mm)

DEFM3-15.0/V260

V260

Steel: 0.010 - 0.25" (0.25 - 6mm)

DEFP2-5.0/M206

M206

Plastic 0.040 - 0.5" (1 - 6mm)

DEFM2-5.0/M206

M206

Steel 0.050 - 0.75" (1.25 - 19mm)

DEFM3-5.0/M206

M206

Steel 0.040 - 0.5" (1 - 6mm)

DEFP2-2.25/M207

M207

Plastic 0.060 - 0.5" (1.5 - 6mm)

DEFM3-2.25 /M207

M207

Steel 0.060 - 0.5" (1.5 - 6mm)

DEFP2-20.0/M316

M316

Plastic 0.010 - 0.250" (0.25 - 6mm)

DEFM3-20.0/M316

M316

Steel 0.010 - 0.250" (0.25 - 6mm)

DEFP2-10.0/M312

M312

Plastic 0.012 - 0.400" (0.3 - 10mm)

DEFM3-10.0/M312

M312

Steel 0.012 - 0.400" (0.3 - 10mm)

Note: The maximum thickness measuring capability on plastics depends on the attenuation
characteristics of the material.

Table 11

NUS

Setup Name and Application (Continued)

^=^=J=q~=p~

Setup Quantity

35 factory default setups. Space for 25 custom defined


setups.

Custom Application Setups

Applications that are not covered by any of the default


setups can be measured by creating a custom setup for
the special application. This setup may be done by
adjusting the parameters of the closest default setup.
A description of the setup parameters, which can be
adjusted to make a custom setup are listed in Table 12
on page 187.

Name

Description

Units/Resolutions/Range

Mode

Echo Detect Mode

1, 2 or 3.

MeasType

Measurement type

Standard or Barrier Layer

ProbeType

Transducer type

One of the 11 Panametrics-NDTTM


transducer types from default
setup list.

PulserPwr

Pulser power

30, 60, or 110 Volts.

MaxGain

Maximum receiver gain

0 - 79.6dB, 1dB steps.

InitGain

Initial TVD gain

0 - MaxGain, 1dB steps.

TDGSlope

Time Gain slope (default

0 - 26.5dB/s, 0.1dB/s steps.

MBBlank

Main Bang Blank

55ns to 200s, 0.14s steps. 22ns or


Echo Window time interval,
whichever is less.

EchWindow

Echo window. Echo detect


gate which begins at end of
MB Blank in Mode 1 Or
Interface Echo In Modes 2 &
3. The value reported for the
end of Echo Window is
relative to the Main Bang.

55ns to 200s, .014 s steps. 55ns or


MB Blank time interval,
whichever is less.

Echo1Detect

Detection polarity of first


echo

+ or -

Echo2Detect

Detection polarity of second


echo

+ or -

Setup Name

Table 12

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Setup Parameter Description

NUT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Name

Description

Units/Resolutions/Range

IFBLANK

Blank after Interface echo

0 -20000 ns, 14 ns steps.

M3Blnk

Blank after first measured


backwall echo in Mode 3

0 - 20000 ns, 14 ns steps.

MatlVel

Ultrasonic sound velocity of


material to be measured

.02000 - .66929"/s (0.5080 17.0000mm/s).

Zero

Zero calibration factor

0 -999.99.

Table 12

Setup Parameter Description (Continued)

General

Display

Dot matrix, graphics, Super Twisted Nematic, monochrome,


transflective, liquid crystal display.
Viewable area is 2.22". x 1.51" (56.28mm x 38.36mm).
Electroluminescent backlight. Contrast is adjustable from the
keypad.

Keypad

Sealed and embossed membrane surface. Tactile and audible


feedback color-coded graphics 30 keys.

Transducers

Can be used with 2.25MHz contact, delay line, and immersion


transducers from 2MHz to 30MHz.

Physical

Size:

9.375" x 5.45" x 1.5


(238mm x 138mm x 38mm)
Weight:
2.1 lb. (0.951 kg)
Case:
Material is Lexan
Construction:
Dust and splash proof
Operating Temperature: -10oC to +50C

Battery and Charger

NUU

Battery Description

6V Rechargeable NiCad pack or field-replaceable alkaline


AA batteries.

Battery Run Time

25 hours typical in Mode 1with 4Hz update rate and


backlight turned off.

Battery Charge Time

2 hours (using 36CAPLUS).

Charger

36CAPLUS charger/AC adapter unit (will not recharge


alkaline batteries).

^=^=J=q~=p~

Optional

Operation with six disposable alkaline AA cell is


available as a factory installed option. 70 hours typical run
time.

Special Gage Functions

General

Access many gage functions, which do not require frequent


changing, by using the Special or SP keypad mode.
Access all these features by pressing [2ND F], [IN/MM] (SP
MODE). Press [ ], [ ], and [ENTER] to select a category
of SP functions (Measurement, Communication,
Diagnostic, Reset, Clock). Finally select a particular
function to modify by pressing [ ], [ ], [ ], [
], and
[ENTER].

List Of Special
Functions

Measurement:
Beeper (on* or off)
Inactive time (on* or off)
Language (English*, Spanish, German, French)
Radix (period* or comma)
Waveform (unfill* or fill)
Backlight mode (normal* or auto)
Supv lock (off* or on)
Save key (thk* or thk & wf)
ID overwrite (off* or on)
Quick setup (off* or on)
* indicates the parameter default
Communication:
Baud (192000*, 9600, 4800, 2400, 1200)
Stop bits (1* or 2)
Parity (none*, odd, or even)
Comm protocol (multiple* or single)
Output format (F1*, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, F8, F9, F10)
* indicates the parameter default
Diagnostic:
Keypad
Video
Hardware status
Hardware control
Error status

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NUV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

RESETS
Measure Reset: (default values)
Std. resolution
4Hz Measure rate
Diff. value 0.000
Diff mode OFF
Display blank
Inactive time on
Alarm off
Low alarm 0.000
High alarm 20.000
Min off
Max off
Backlight off
Communication Reset: (default values)
Baud: 19200
Stop bit: 1
Parity: none
Comm protocol: multiple
Output format: F1
Dbase Reset:
This reset function clears the entire data base. Use
CAUTION: this function will erase all stored data, which
cannot be recalled.
Master Reset:
Performs all Measurement, Communications and Dbase
resets simultaneously.

NVM

^=_=J=p=s

Appendix B - Sound Velocities


The following table consists of the ultrasonic velocity in a variety of common materials.
Use this table only as a guide. The actual velocity in these materials may vary significantly
due to a variety of causes, such as, composition, preferred crystallographic orientation,
porosity, and temperature. Therefore, for maximum accuracy, establish the sound
velocity in a given material by first testing a sample of the material.

Material

V (in./usec)

V (mm/usec)

Ref

Alumina, Al203 99.5%

0.4013

10.19

Aluminum, rolled

0.253

6.420

Aluminum,6061T6

0.251

6.383

Beryllium

0.5073

12.89

Brass, yellow 70 Cu, 30 Zn

0.1850

4.700

Brass, yellow 70 Cu, 30 Zn

0.1726

4.385

Copper, rolled

0.1972

5.010

Duraluminum, 17S

0.2487

6.320

Fused Silica

0.2349

5.968

Fused Silica

0.2335

5.932

Glass, crown

0.2008

5.100

Glass, flint

0.1567

3.980

Glass, pyrex

0.2220

5.640

Iron, Armco

0.2345

5.960

Lead, rolled

0.0771

1.960

Lucite

0.1055

2.680

Magnesium, drawn annealed

0.2270

5.770

Molybdenum

0.247

6.25

Monel

0.2105

5.350

Nickel

0.2377

6.040

Nylon

0.1031

2.735

Polyethylene

0.0705

1.950

Table 13

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Sound Velocities of Various Materials (Longitudinal Wave Velocity)

NVN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Material

V (in./usec)

V (mm/usec)

Ref

Polystyrene

0.0925

2.350

Silicone Rubber RTV

0.0373

0.948

Steel, low alloy

0.2259

5.734

Steel, mild

0.2346

5.960

Steel, 1% C

0.2339

5.940

Steel, 1% C, hardened

0.2305

5.854

Stainless Steel #347

0.2278

5.790

Titanium

0.237

5.99

Tungsten, drawn

0.2129

5.410

Uranium

0.133

3.37

Water

0.0590

1.498

Zinc, rolled

0.1657

4.210

Zinc, extruded

0.1756

4.460

Table 13

Sound Velocities of Various Materials (Longitudinal Wave Velocity)


(Continued)

References

Folds, D. L. Experimental Determination of Ultrasonic Wave Velocities in Plastics,


Elastomers, and Syntactic Foam as a Function of Temperature, Naval Research and
Development Laboratory, Panama City, Florida, 1971.
Fredericks, J. R. Ultrasonic Engineering, John Wiley & Sons, Inc., New York, 1965.
Handbook of Chemistry and Physics Chemical Rubber Co., Cleveland, Ohio, 1963.
Mason, W. P. Physical Acoustics and the Properties of Solids, D.Van Nostrand Co., New
York, 1958.
Papadakis, E. P. Panametrics - unpublished notes, 1972.

NVO

^=`=J=p~=f~

Appendix C - Serial Interface


Mechanical Description

The Input-Output (I/O) connector, a 6 position circular LEMO style receptacle, is located
in the center of the top of the Model 25MULTI PLUS. The mating connector inserts into
the
I/O connector with the red dot upward and pushed straight in until it snaps into place. To
withdraw, pull the collet to release the latch and pull straight out.
Panametrics-NDTTM provides cables to connect the Model 25MULTI PLUS to devices
with standard DB-25 male and female connectors and also the IBM PC-AT 9 male pin
serial I/O connector. Use the information in Table 14 on page 193 as a reference to verify
particular equipment compatibility with the Model 25MULTI PLUS, and as an aid in
constructing a custom cable if necessary.

Model
25MULTI
PLUS I/O
Connector

Wire Name

Signal Name

IBM PC-AT
Connector

STD DB25
Pin #

Foil/tinned
copper

Ground

Red

Data from Gage

Orange

Data to Gage

Yellow

Do not connect

Green

DTR from Gage

Blue

DSR to Gage

20

Table 14

Equipment Compatibility

Panametrics-NDTTM

Length
(Meters)

Cable Connector

Stock No.

Part No.

704-689-01

36DLC/9F-6

IBM PC-AT (9 Pin Female)

704-690-01

36DLC/25M-6

25 Pin Male D

704-691-01

36DLC/25F-6

25 Pin Female D (PC/XT)

704-689-02

36DLC/9F-12

12

IBM PC-AT (9 Pin Female)

704-690-02

36DLC/25M12

12

25 Pin Male D

Table 15

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Length
(Feet)

Standard 36DL PLUS I/O Cables

NVP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Panametrics-NDTTM

Length
(Feet)

Length
(Meters)

Cable Connector

Stock No.

Part No.

704-691-02

36DLC/25F12

12

25 Pin Female D (PC/XT)

704-718-06

36DLC/9M/
PR-6

9 Pin Male D (Portable


Printer)

Table 15

Standard 36DL PLUS I/O Cables (Continued)

Note:

Custom cables with a user specified terminal connector may be ordered from
Panametrics-NDTTM.

Electrical Definition and Data Format

Data is transmitted on one line (data out of gage) and received on another line (data into
gage). Transfer is asynchronous serial. Baud rate, word length, stop bits and parity are
selectable from the keyboard. Data consists of ASCII coded character strings.
Signal levels are RS-232 C/D compatible. Mark is less than -2.5 volts. Space is greater
than +2.5V. The maximum output signal range is 5.50 volts. The maximum input signal
range is 20 volts.
The following two hardware handshake lines are included:

NVQ

DTR:

The gage sets DTR low (<-2.5V) when it is not able to receive data. DTR is high
(>+2.5V) at all times.

DSR:

A high (>+2.5V) supplied by the external device (or by being connected to the
DTR line) enables the gage to transmit data. A low (<-2.5V) supplied by the
external device, or by being connected to the RTS line, prevents the gage from
transmitting data.

Note:

If the external device does not provide the proper DSR signal, then you must
connect DTR to DSR (jump pin 6 to pin 20 in the 25 position cable
connector), or in the 25 pin connector on the attached equipment.

^=a=J=a~~=l=c~

Appendix D - Data Output Format


There are 10 data formats that the 25MULTI PLUS is capable of sending. F-1 to F-6 are
25DLPlus series formats, while F-7 to F-10 are 26DL PLUS compatible formats. The
25MULTI PLUS also has File Transfer Protocol (FTP) to transfer files back and forth
between the gage and the PC. See Appendix E - Remote Control Via RS-232 on page 223
for more information about FTP.

File
ID
Thickness Wave- Setup
Format Header Header Table
forms Table
F-1

F-2

F-3
F-4
F-5

X
X

F-6

F-7

F-8

F-9

F-10

Table 16

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Appsetup
Note
Statistics Table
Table

X
X

Model 25DL PLUS Output Formats

NVR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Format - F1
This format includes file header, 25MULTI PLUS thickness table with waveforms (whenever present),
setup table and note table.

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
FILE NAME: A0000001
FILE TYPE: INCREMENTAL
FILE DESCRIPTION: DEMO OUTPUT FORMAT
INSPECTOR ID: PANAMETRICS TESTER 9999999999999
LOCATION NOTE: WALTHAM MA 02453 USA
FILE DELETE PROTECTION: ON
OK
IDENTIFIER THICKNESS UNITS FLAGS NOTES SU #
0000000001
0.289 IN M--1WF AB 0002
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 9E 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 14 04 14 04 35
35 67 67 7C 6C 77 69 73 73 84 82 84 7E 82 7F 81 81 83 82 83
80 82 80 81 81 82 81 82 81 83 81 81 81 82 81 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83
82 82 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82
81 82 81 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83
82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 82 81 81 81 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 83 81 82 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 82 81 82 82 83 83 86
86 9C 9C A7 7A A7 4F 7A 36 4F 41 64 64 9C 96 9C 94 96 94 96
91 96 84 91 80 84 7E 80 7D 7E 7C 7D 7C 7D 7D 80 80 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 82
82 82 82 83 81 82 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 82
81 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
81 82 81 81 81 81 81 81 81 82 82 83 82 83 82 84 84 84 83 84
83 83 83 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 81 82 80 81 80 81 81 82 81 81
81 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 81 82 81 82 82 82 82 82
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
DETECTION MARKER1 = 132

NVS

^=a=J=a~~=l=c~

Format - F1 (Continued)
This format includes file header, 25MULTI PLUS thickness table with waveforms (whenever present),
setup table and note table.

DETECTION MARKER2 = 0
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 24
ECHO WINDOW END = 207
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0
MODE3 BLANK START = 0
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
0000000002
0.386 IN M--1WF CD 0002
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 9D 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 00 03 00 1F
1F 5C 5C 7B 67 77 61 6E 6E 84 83 84 7E 83 7E 81 81 84 83 84
80 83 80 81 81 81 81 81 80 82 80 81 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82
82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 84 82 84 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 83 83 81 83 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 84 82 84 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 84 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 84 82 84 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 84
82 84 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 83 83 84 84 96
96 A2 8B A2 60 8B 38 60 38 79 79 98 98 A4 99 A0 97 99 94 97
83 94 7D 83 7A 7D 7B 7B 7B 7C 7C 7D 7D 82 82 83 83 83 83 83
83 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NVT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Format - F1 (Continued)
This format includes file header, 25MULTI PLUS thickness table with waveforms (whenever present),
setup table and note table.

DETECTION MARKER1 = 171


DETECTION MARKER2 = 0
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 24
ECHO WINDOW END = 207
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0
MODE3 BLANK START = 0
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
0000000003
0.483 IN M--1WF
0002
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 9C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 7A 62 7A 6F 85 7D 83 81 84
80 83 81 82 80 81 81 82 81 82 82 82 81 82 81 82 81 82 82 82
82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 83 82 83 82 82 82 83
82 83 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 81 83 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 82
82 83 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83
82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 83 82 83 81 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 84
82 84 82 83 82 83 82 84 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 88 88 A2
40 A2 36 7B 7B AD 91 A6 80 91 78 80 79 80 80 84 82 84 82 83
82 83 81 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 81 82 82 83
81 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 82
80 82 80 82 82 84 83 84 83 84 82 83 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 83
82 83 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83
82 83 82 83 82 83 81 82 81 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83
82 83 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 82 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 82 81 84 84 8D 6B 8D 63 83 83 A1
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00

NVU

^=a=J=a~~=l=c~

Format - F1 (Continued)
This format includes file header, 25MULTI PLUS thickness table with waveforms (whenever present),
setup table and note table.

RANGE = 1.00
DETECTION MARKER1 = 109
DETECTION MARKER2 = 0
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 16
ECHO WINDOW END = 207
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0
MODE3 BLANK START = 0
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
OK
SU # VEL(/uS) DIFF LO-ALM HI-ALM UNITS
0002 0.22600 1.000 0.000 20.000 IN
OK
CODE COMMENT
A 001
B 002
C 003
D 004
OK

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

NVV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Format - F2
This format includes file header, 25MULTI PLUS thickness table, setup table and note table and excludes
waveform.

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
FILE NAME: A0000001
FILE TYPE: INCREMENTAL
FILE DESCRIPTION: DEMO OUTPUT FORMAT
INSPECTOR ID: PANAMETRICS TESTER 9999999999999
LOCATION NOTE: WALTHAM MA 02453 USA
FILE DELETE PROTECTION: ON
OK
IDENTIFIER
0000000001
0000000002
0000000003
OK

THICKNESS
0.289 IN
0.386 IN
0.483 IN

UNITS FLAGS NOTES SU #


M--1WF AB 0002
M--1WF CD 0002
M--1WF
0002

SU # VEL(/uS) DIFF LO-ALM HI-ALM UNITS


0002 0.22600 1.000 0.000 20.000 IN
OK
CODE COMMENT
A 001
B 002
C 003
D 004
OK

OMM

^=a=J=a~~=l=c~

Format - F3
This format includes 25MULTI PLUS thickness table with waveforms (whenever present) setup table,
application setup table and note table and excludes fileheader.

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
IDENTIFIER THICKNESS UNITS FLAGS NOTES SU #
0000000001
0.289 IN M--1WF AB 0002
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 9E 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 14 04 14 04 35
35 67 67 7C 6C 77 69 73 73 84 82 84 7E 82 7F 81 81 83 82 83
80 82 80 81 81 82 81 82 81 83 81 81 81 82 81 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83
82 82 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82
81 82 81 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83
82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 82 81 81 81 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 83 81 82 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 82 81 82 82 83 83 86
86 9C 9C A7 7A A7 4F 7A 36 4F 41 64 64 9C 96 9C 94 96 94 96
91 96 84 91 80 84 7E 80 7D 7E 7C 7D 7C 7D 7D 80 80 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 82
82 82 82 83 81 82 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 82
81 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
81 82 81 81 81 81 81 81 81 82 82 83 82 83 82 84 84 84 83 84
83 83 83 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 81 82 80 81 80 81 81 82 81 81
81 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 81 82 81 82 82 82 82 82
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
DETECTION MARKER1 = 132
DETECTION MARKER2 = 0
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 24
ECHO WINDOW END = 207
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0
MODE3 BLANK START = 0
MODE3 BLANK END = 0

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

OMN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Format - F3 (Continued)
This format includes 25MULTI PLUS thickness table with waveforms (whenever present) setup table,
application setup table and note table and excludes fileheader.

DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
0000000002
0.386 IN M--1WF CD 0002
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 9D 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 00 03 00 1F
1F 5C 5C 7B 67 77 61 6E 6E 84 83 84 7E 83 7E 81 81 84 83 84
80 83 80 81 81 81 81 81 80 82 80 81 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82
82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 84 82 84 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 83 83 81 83 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 84 82 84 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 84 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 84 82 84 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 84
82 84 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 83 83 84 84 96
96 A2 8B A2 60 8B 38 60 38 79 79 98 98 A4 99 A0 97 99 94 97
83 94 7D 83 7A 7D 7B 7B 7B 7C 7C 7D 7D 82 82 83 83 83 83 83
83 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
DETECTION MARKER1 = 171
DETECTION MARKER2 = 0
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 24
ECHO WINDOW END = 207
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0
MODE3 BLANK START = 0

OMO

^=a=J=a~~=l=c~

Format - F3 (Continued)
This format includes 25MULTI PLUS thickness table with waveforms (whenever present) setup table,
application setup table and note table and excludes fileheader.

MODE3 BLANK END = 0


DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
0000000003
0.483 IN M--1WF
0002
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 9C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 7A 62 7A 6F 85 7D 83 81 84
80 83 81 82 80 81 81 82 81 82 82 82 81 82 81 82 81 82 82 82
82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 83 82 83 82 82 82 83
82 83 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 81 83 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 82
82 83 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83
82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 83 82 83 81 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 84
82 84 82 83 82 83 82 84 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 88 88 A2
40 A2 36 7B 7B AD 91 A6 80 91 78 80 79 80 80 84 82 84 82 83
82 83 81 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 81 82 82 83
81 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 82
80 82 80 82 82 84 83 84 83 84 82 83 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 83
82 83 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83
82 83 82 83 82 83 81 82 81 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83
82 83 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 82 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 82 81 84 84 8D 6B 8D 63 83 83 A1
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 1.00
DETECTION MARKER1 = 109
DETECTION MARKER2 = 0
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 16
ECHO WINDOW END = 207
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

OMP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Format - F3 (Continued)
This format includes 25MULTI PLUS thickness table with waveforms (whenever present) setup table,
application setup table and note table and excludes fileheader.

MODE3 BLANK START = 0


MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
OK
SU # VEL(/uS) DIFF LO-ALM HI-ALM UNITS
0002 0.22600 1.000 0.000 20.000 IN
OK
SETUP NUMBER : 0002
SETUP NAME : DEFM1-10.0/M112
MEASUREMENT TYPE : 1
PROBE TYPE : 4
MATERIAL VELOCITY : 0.22600IN/us
ZERO : 214.00
PULSER VOLTAGE : 3
MAXIMUM GAIN : 2400
INITIAL GAIN : 1344
TDG SLOPE : 2862
MAIN BANG BLANK : 25
ECHO WINDOW : 13967
DETECTION MODE : 1
ECHO1 DETECTION : 1
ECHO2 DETECTION : N/A
INTERFACE BLANK : N/A
MODE3 ECHO BLANK : N/A
DATA WINDOW 1 : N/A
DATA WINDOW 2 : N/A
OK

CODE COMMENT
A 001
B 002

OMQ

^=a=J=a~~=l=c~

Format - F3 (Continued)
This format includes 25MULTI PLUS thickness table with waveforms (whenever present) setup table,
application setup table and note table and excludes fileheader.

C 003
D 004
OK

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

OMR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Format - F4
This format includes only thickness information.

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
+0.289
+0.386
+0.483

Format - F5
This format includes 25MULTI PLUS thickness table, setup table and excludes fileheader and waveform.

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
IDENTIFIER
0000000001
0000000002
0000000003
OK

THICKNESS
0.289 IN
0.386 IN
0.483 IN

UNITS
M--1WF
M--1WF
M--1WF

FLAGS SU #
0002
0002
0002

SU # VEL(/uS) DIFF LO-ALM HI-ALM UNITS


0002 0.22600 1.000 0.000 20.000 IN
OK

OMS

^=a=J=a~~=l=c~

Format - F6
This format includes 25MULTI PLUS thickness table (no id header) with waveforms (whenever present),
setup table, application setup table and statistics and excludes fileheader and note table.

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
0000000001
0.289 IN M--1WF AB 0002
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 9E 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 14 04 14 04 35
35 67 67 7C 6C 77 69 73 73 84 82 84 7E 82 7F 81 81 83 82 83
80 82 80 81 81 82 81 82 81 83 81 81 81 82 81 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83
82 82 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82
81 82 81 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83
82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 82 81 81 81 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 83 81 82 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 82 81 82 82 83 83 86
86 9C 9C A7 7A A7 4F 7A 36 4F 41 64 64 9C 96 9C 94 96 94 96
91 96 84 91 80 84 7E 80 7D 7E 7C 7D 7C 7D 7D 80 80 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 82
82 82 82 83 81 82 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 82
81 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
81 82 81 81 81 81 81 81 81 82 82 83 82 83 82 84 84 84 83 84
83 83 83 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 81 82 80 81 80 81 81 82 81 81
81 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 81 82 81 82 82 82 82 82
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
DETECTION MARKER1 = 132
DETECTION MARKER2 = 0
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 24
ECHO WINDOW END = 207
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0
MODE3 BLANK START = 0
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

OMT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Format - F6 (Continued)
This format includes 25MULTI PLUS thickness table (no id header) with waveforms (whenever present),
setup table, application setup table and statistics and excludes fileheader and note table.

DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
0000000002
0.386 IN M--1WF CD 0002
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 9D 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 03 00 03 00 1F
1F 5C 5C 7B 67 77 61 6E 6E 84 83 84 7E 83 7E 81 81 84 83 84
80 83 80 81 81 81 81 81 80 82 80 81 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82
82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 84 82 84 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 83 83 81 83 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 84 82 84 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 84 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 84 82 84 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 84
82 84 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 83 83 84 84 96
96 A2 8B A2 60 8B 38 60 38 79 79 98 98 A4 99 A0 97 99 94 97
83 94 7D 83 7A 7D 7B 7B 7B 7C 7C 7D 7D 82 82 83 83 83 83 83
83 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
DETECTION MARKER1 = 171
DETECTION MARKER2 = 0
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 24
ECHO WINDOW END = 207
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0
MODE3 BLANK START = 0
MODE3 BLANK END = 0

OMU

^=a=J=a~~=l=c~

Format - F6 (Continued)
This format includes 25MULTI PLUS thickness table (no id header) with waveforms (whenever present),
setup table, application setup table and statistics and excludes fileheader and note table.

DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
0000000003
0.483 IN M--1WF
0002
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
00 9C 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 00 7A 62 7A 6F 85 7D 83 81 84
80 83 81 82 80 81 81 82 81 82 82 82 81 82 81 82 81 82 82 82
82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 83 82 83 82 82 82 83
82 83 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 81 83 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83
82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 82
82 83 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83
82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 83 82 83 81 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 84
82 84 82 83 82 83 82 84 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 88 88 A2
40 A2 36 7B 7B AD 91 A6 80 91 78 80 79 80 80 84 82 84 82 83
82 83 81 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 81 82 82 83
81 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 82 82 82
82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82 82 83 82 82
80 82 80 82 82 84 83 84 83 84 82 83 81 82 82 82 82 82 82 83
82 83 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 82 83
82 83 82 83 82 83 81 82 81 82 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 83
82 83 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 83 82 83 82 82
82 82 82 83 83 83 82 83 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 82 83
82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 81 82 81 84 84 8D 6B 8D 63 83 83 A1
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 1.00
DETECTION MARKER1 = 109
DETECTION MARKER2 = 0
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 16
ECHO WINDOW END = 207
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0
MODE3 BLANK START = 0

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

OMV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Format - F6 (Continued)
This format includes 25MULTI PLUS thickness table (no id header) with waveforms (whenever present),
setup table, application setup table and statistics and excludes fileheader and note table.

MODE3 BLANK END = 0


DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
OK
SU # VEL(/uS) DIFF LO-ALM HI-ALM UNITS
0002 0.22600 1.000 0.000 20.000 IN
OK
SETUP NUMBER : 0002
SETUP NAME : DEFM1-10.0/M112
MEASUREMENT TYPE : 1
PROBE TYPE : 4
MATERIAL VELOCITY : 0.22600IN/us
ZERO : 214.00
PULSER VOLTAGE : 3
MAXIMUM GAIN : 2400
INITIAL GAIN : 1344
TDG SLOPE : 2862
MAIN BANG BLANK : 25
ECHO WINDOW : 13967
DETECTION MODE : 1
ECHO1 DETECTION : 1
ECHO2 DETECTION : N/A
INTERFACE BLANK : N/A
MODE3 ECHO BLANK : N/A
DATA WINDOW 1 : N/A
DATA WINDOW 2 : N/A
OK

*** STATISTICS ***


# OF THK
MEAN

ONM

:3
: 0.386 IN

^=a=J=a~~=l=c~

Format - F6 (Continued)
This format includes 25MULTI PLUS thickness table (no id header) with waveforms (whenever present),
setup table, application setup table and statistics and excludes fileheader and note table.

MEDIAN
: 0.386 IN
STD. DEVIATION : 0.097 IN
# OF HIGH ALARM : 0
% OF HIGH ALARM : 0 %
# OF LOW ALARM : 0
% OF LOW ALARM : 0 %
# OF MINS : 1
MIN. VALUE : 0.289 IN
# OF MAXS : 1
MAX. VALUE : 0.483 IN
OK

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

ONN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Format - F7
This is in conformance with the 26DL PLUS 16-character id format. This format includes 26DL PLUS
thickness table (no id header) in 16-character id format with waveforms (whenever present) and setup
table and note table.

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
0000000001
0.289 IN M--1W- 0002
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
32 00 00 00 06 24 22 26 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 26
34 34 18 32 30 30 26 24 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 26
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
DETECTION MARKER1 = 66
DETECTION MARKER2 = 0
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 12
ECHO WINDOW END = 103
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0
MODE3 BLANK START = 0
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
0000000002
0.386 IN
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
32 00 00 00 00 23 22 26 25 26
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 26 26 25 25 25 25 25 25

ONO

M--1W- 0002

^=a=J=a~~=l=c~

Format - F7 (Continued)
This is in conformance with the 26DL PLUS 16-character id format. This format includes 26DL PLUS
thickness table (no id header) in 16-character id format with waveforms (whenever present) and setup
table and note table.

25 25 25 26 25 25 25 26 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 26 25
25 25 25 25 26 26 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 30
33 27 31 34 31 30 24 24 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
DETECTION MARKER1 = 85
DETECTION MARKER2 = 0
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 12
ECHO WINDOW END = 103
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0
MODE3 BLANK START = 0
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
0000000003
0.483 IN
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
32 00 23 26 26 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 26 26 26 25 25 33
33 36 29 26 26 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 26 26 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 28 33
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

M--1W- 0002

ONP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Format - F7 (Continued)
This is in conformance with the 26DL PLUS 16-character id format. This format includes 26DL PLUS
thickness table (no id header) in 16-character id format with waveforms (whenever present) and setup
table and note table.

RANGE = 1.00
DETECTION MARKER1 = 54
DETECTION MARKER2 = 0
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 8
ECHO WINDOW END = 103
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0
MODE3 BLANK START = 0
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
OK
SU # VEL(/uS) DIFF LO-ALM HI-ALM UNITS
0002 0.22600 1.000 0.000 20.000 IN
OK
CODE COMMENT
A 001
B 002
C 003
D 004
OK

ONQ

^=a=J=a~~=l=c~

Format - F8
This is in conformance with the 26DL PLUS 16-character id format. This format includes 26DL PLUS
thickness table (no id header) in 16-character id format without waveforms, setup table and note table.

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
0000000001
0.289 IN M--1W- 0002
0000000002
0.386 IN M--1W- 0002
0000000003
0.483 IN M--1W- 0002
OK
SU # VEL(/uS) DIFF LO-ALM HI-ALM UNITS
0002 0.22600 1.000 0.000 20.000 IN
OK
CODE COMMENT
A 001
B 002
C 003
D 004
OK

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

ONR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Format - F9
This is in conformance with the 26DL PLUS 12-character id format. This format includes 26DL PLUS
thickness table with waveforms (whenever present) in 12-character id format and setup table.

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
IDENTIFIER THICKNESS UNITS FLAGS SU #
0000000001 0.289 IN M--1WA 0002
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
32 00 00 00 06 24 22 26 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 26
34 34 18 32 30 30 26 24 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 26
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
DETECTION MARKER1 = 66
DETECTION MARKER2 = 0
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 12
ECHO WINDOW END = 103
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0
MODE3 BLANK START = 0
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
0000000002 0.386 IN M--1WC 0002
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
32 00 00 00 00 23 22 26 25 26
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 26 26 25 25 25 25 25 25

ONS

^=a=J=a~~=l=c~

Format - F9 (Continued)
This is in conformance with the 26DL PLUS 12-character id format. This format includes 26DL PLUS
thickness table with waveforms (whenever present) in 12-character id format and setup table.

25 25 25 26 25 25 25 26 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 26 25
25 25 25 25 26 26 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 30
33 27 31 34 31 30 24 24 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00
RANGE = 0.50
DETECTION MARKER1 = 85
DETECTION MARKER2 = 0
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 12
ECHO WINDOW END = 103
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0
MODE3 BLANK START = 0
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
0000000003 0.483 IN M--1W- 0002
PIXEL AMPLITUDES
32 00 23 26 26 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 26 26 26 25 25 33
33 36 29 26 26 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 26 26 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25 25
25 25 25 25 25 25 25 26 28 33
ZOOM = FALSE
DELAY = 0.00

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

ONT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Format - F9 (Continued)
This is in conformance with the 26DL PLUS 12-character id format. This format includes 26DL PLUS
thickness table with waveforms (whenever present) in 12-character id format and setup table.

RANGE = 1.00
DETECTION MARKER1 = 54
DETECTION MARKER2 = 0
MAIN BANG BLANK END = 8
ECHO WINDOW END = 103
INTERFACE BLANK START = 0
INTERFACE BLANK END = 0
MODE3 BLANK START = 0
MODE3 BLANK END = 0
DATAWIN 1 START = 0
DATAWIN 1 END = 0
DATAWIN 2 START = 0
DATAWIN 2 END = 0
RECTIFICATION = RF
OK
SU # VEL(/uS) DIFF LO-ALM HI-ALM UNITS
0002 0.22600 1.000 0.000 20.000 IN
OK

ONU

^=a=J=a~~=l=c~

Format - F10
This is in conformance with the 26DL PLUS 12-character id format. This format includes 26DL PLUS
thickness table without waveforms in 12-character id format and setup table.

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789
IDENTIFIER THICKNESS UNITS FLAGS SU #
0000000001 0.289 IN M--1WA 0002
0000000002 0.386 IN M--1WC 0002
0000000003 0.483 IN M--1W- 0002
OK
SU # VEL(/uS) DIFF LO-ALM HI-ALM UNITS
0002 0.22600 1.000 0.000 20.000 IN
OK

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

ONV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Thickness Table: A thickness table consists of a header line, thickness data and
waveform data. The thickness table has some differences in the different formats.
There are six flags associated with each thickness reading in the Thickness Table. In
formats F-1 and F-2, the sixth flag is DN Flag; while in format F-5, the sixth flag
represents a comment code. These are positional and their possible values are shown
below:
Flag

Flag Condition

FLAG #1

M = Normal Meas
L = Normal LOS

FLAG #2

Differential Mode
D-Differential Mode
d -% Differential Mode

Remarks

Measured Echo
Loss Of Signal

Standard Alarm
A-Alarm Mode
H-High Alarm
L-Low Alarm
Percent Previous Mode
p-Alarm Mode
r-Reduction Alarm
g-Growth Alarm
Absolute Previous Alarm Mode
P-Alarm mode
R-Reduction Alarm
G-Growth Alarm
FLAG #3

- = None
m = Minimum
M = Maximum

No Min., No Max.
Minimum reading
Maximum reading

FLAG #4

- = Default Gain
G = Gain Mode

Default Gain; AGC Waveform


Gain Changed manually

FLAG #5

- = No Waveform
W = Waveform

No stored waveform
Waveform stored

FLAG #6
(F1, F2)

T = DN True
F = DN False

Downloaded or created ID
Data stored

FLAG #6
(F5 to F8)

- = No Comment
A thru Z = Comment Code

No comment stored
Comment code

Table 17

Flag Conditions

A single line consisting of the text OK immediately follows the end of the Thickness
Table.

OOM

^=a=J=a~~=l=c~

Setup Table: This table consists of a header line followed by 1 to 32 data lines. There is
one data line for each unique setup listed in the thickness table. In general, many
thicknesses/waveforms may share a common setup. The number of setups is limited to
64. When the setup table is full, any new setups are allocated the #00 and this entry in
the setup table indicates such status. Setup table has some differences in the different
formats.

A blank line precedes the Setup Table.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

OON

j=ORjriqf=mirp

OOO

^=b=J=o=`=s~=opJOPO

Appendix E - Remote Control Via RS-232


You can control the Model 25MULTI PLUS from an external computer or programmable
controller using the serial RS-232 cable. In addition, you can also perform most gage
keypad functions by transmitting the proper commands to the gage over the serial cable.
These functions include setup, calibration, and data storage and retrieval. Each Model
25MULTI PLUS key has a corresponding remote command. For example, you can load a
complete setup and calibration parameters to the gage from a computer at the beginning of
each workshift without performing a manual setup and calibration.
Another computer control feature is the on-line or robotic thickness measurement and
reporting. A computer or machine controller directs the positioning of an ultrasonic
transducer on a robot arm while at the same time electronically entering the keys on the
Model 25MULTI PLUS. For example, an unattended computer could set up and change to
Differential Measurement mode, change resolution, calibrate and/or set different
velocity values, or read the various thickness values. The controlling program can repeat
the same sequence of steps for each product to be measured.
The command set is divided in two formats:
Multi-Character commands: Multi-Character commands consist of two or more
characters and maybe followed by a terminator.
Single-Character commands: Single-Character commands consist of a single character
with no terminator, used to imitate keystrokes on the gage remotely.

To change the command formats, follow these steps.


1. Press [2ndF], [0] (SP MODE).
2. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Communication option. Press [ENTER].
3. Press [ ] and [ ] to highlight the Comm Protocol option.
4. Press [ ] and [ ] to toggle between the SINGLE or MULTI character command.
Press [ENTER].
Multi-character Commands

This section describes all Multi-Character commands and illustrates the syntax used with
each command.
Note:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Commands are case sensitive and, if appropriate, terminated with a carriagereturn line-feed pair i.e., ( /r/n ) .

OOP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

File Directory

This command instructs the gage to send to the host, (the sender of the command) the file
directory that exists on the gage. Refer to Panametrics-NDTTM document 25 series FTP
for details on the format received data.
Command FORMAT:

FILEDIR?\r\n

\r is an escape sequence for carriage return.


\n is an escape sequence for line-feed.
File Read

This command instructs the gage to send to the host, (the sender of the command) a file
that exists on the gage. Refer to Panametrics-NDT document 25 series FTP for details on
the file received by the host.
Command FORMAT:

FILEREAD?\2\r\n

FREAD INFO block

\3
Notes:
\2 is an escape sequence meaning the ASCII data 2 hex, 2 decimal or the STX
character.
\3 is an escape sequence meaning the ASCII data 3 hex, 3 decimal or the ETX
character.
See Panametrics-NDTTM document 25 series FTP for the definition of a FREAD
INFO block,

File Write

This command instructs the gage to prepare for receiving a file that is sent by the host, (the
sender of the command). Refer to Panametrics-NDT document 25 series FTP for details
on the file data format.
Command FORMAT:

FILEWRITE=\2\r\n

TRANSMISSION INFO block


FILE HEADER INFO block
ID INFO block
SU TABLE INFO block
NOTE TABLE INFO block

\3
Notes:
\2 is an escape sequence meaning the ASCII data 2 hex, 2 decimal or the STX
character.

OOQ

^=b=J=o=`=s~=opJOPO

\3 is an escape sequence meaning the ASCII data 3 hex, 3 decimal or the ETX
character.
See Panametrics-NDTTM document 25 series FTP for the definition of the required
INFO blocks used,
File Delete

This command instructs the gage to delete a file that is on the gage. Refer to PanametricsNDT document 25 series FTP for definition of filedelete packet.
Command FORMAT:

FILEDELETE\2\r\n

FILEDELETE Info Block


\3
Notes:
\2 is an escape sequence meaning the ASCII data 2 hex, 2 decimal or the STX
character.
\3 is an escape sequence meaning the ASCII data 3 hex, 3 decimal or the ETX
character.
See Panametrics-NDT document 25 series FTP for the definition of the required
INFO blocks used,

Communication ProtocolChange

This command instructs the gage to change the communication protocol from multiple to
single.
Command FORMAT:

PROTO=SINGLE\r\n

Application Setup Directory


This command instructs the gage to send to the host, (the sender of the command) the
active setup and all of the user setups that exists on the gage. Refer to Panametrics-NDTTM
document 25 series FTP for details on the format received data i.e.
APP_SU_TABLE_INFO block
Command FORMAT:

APPSUDIR?\r\n

\r is an escape sequence for carriage return.


\n is an escape sequence for line-feed.

Application Setup Read

This command instructs the gage to send to the host, (the sender of the command) the
application setup that is requested. Refer to Panametrics-NDT document 25 series FTP
for details on the APP SU INDEX block and APP SU INFO block sent to the host.

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

OOR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Command FORMAT: APPSUREAD?\2\r\n


APP SU INDEX block

\3
\r is an escape sequence for carriage return.
\n is an escape sequence for line-feed.
\2 is an escape sequence meaning the ASCII data 2 hex, 2 decimal or the STX
character.
\3 is an escape sequence meaning the ASCII data 3 hex, 3 decimal or the ETX
character.

Application Setup Write

This command instructs the gage to receive an application setup that is sent to the host,
(the sender of the command).Refer to Panametrics-NDTTM document 25 series FTP for
details on the APP SU INDEX block and APP SU INFO block sent to the host.
Command FORMAT: APPSUWRITE=\2\r\n
APP SU INDEX block
APP SU INFO block

\3
\r is an escape sequence for carriage return.
\ n is an escape sequence for line-feed.
\2 is an escape sequence meaning the ASCII data 2 hex, 2 decimal or the STX
character.
\3 is an escape sequence meaning the ASCII data 3 hex, 3 decimal or the ETX
character.
Notes:
Refer to 26DLP manual for further details.

Make Application Setup Active

This command instructs the gage to make the given application setup the active
setup.Refer to Panametrics-NDTTM document 25 series FTP for details on the APP SU
INDEX block.

Command FORMAT:

APPSUWRITE=\2\r\n

APP SU INDEX block

OOS

^=b=J=o=`=s~=opJOPO

APP SU INFO block


\3
\r is an escape sequence for carriage return.
\n is an escape sequence for line-feed.
\2 is an escape sequence meaning the ASCII data 2 hex, 2 decimal or the STX
character.
\3 is an escape sequence meaning the ASCII data 3 hex, 3 decimal or the ETX
character.
Notes:
Refer to 26DLP manual for further details.

Units Get

This command instructs the gage to send the current units (IN/MM) to the host.
Command FORMAT:

UNITS?\r\n

Version Get

This command instructs the gage to send the current software version of the gage to the
host.
Command FORMAT:

VER?\r\n

Range Send

This command instructs the gage to do a range send of all of the IDs in the current file to
the host.
Command FORMAT:

ntt

Go to Monitor Mode

This command instructs the gage to go to the Monitor mode.


Command FORMAT:

MONITOR=GO\r\n

Mode Get

This command instructs the gage to send the current Measurement mode (1,2,3) of the
gage to the host.
Command FORMAT:

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

MODE?\r\n

OOT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Single-Character Commands

This section describes all Single-Character commands and illustrates the syntax used with
each command.

Command Name

ASCII
Character

Dec

Hex

Corresponding
Gage Key
Stroke(s)

Setup Adjust

33

21

[2nd], [1]

Units

35

23

[2nd], [3]

Meas Rate

36

24

[2nd], [4]

Min/Max

37

25

[2nd], [5]

Hold/Blank

&

38

26

[2nd], [7]

Diff

40

28

[2nd], [9]

Sp Mode

41

29

[2nd], [0]

Alarm

42

2A

[2nd], [8]

Number 0

48

30

[0]

Number 1

49

31

[1]

Number 2

50

32

[2]

Number 3

51

33

[3]

Number 4

52

34

[4]

Number 5

53

35

[5]

Number 6

54

36

[6]

Number 7

55

37

[7]

Number 8

56

38

[8]

Number 9

57

39

[9]

Resolution

64

40

[2nd], [2]

LCD Adjust

66

42

[2nd], [Light]

Cal Lock

67

43

[6], [3]
Simultaneously

Slew Down

68

44

[ ]

Clear Memory

69

45

[2nd], [File]

Table 18

OOU

COMMAND Syntax

Command Syntax

^=b=J=o=`=s~=opJOPO

Command Name

ASCII
Character

Dec

Hex

Corresponding
Gage Key
Stroke(s)

Rectification

70

46

[2nd], [Freeze]

Gain Optimization

71

47

[2nd], [Gain]

Clear Memory

69

45

[2nd], [File]

Rectification

70

46

[2nd], [Freeze]

Gain Optimization

71

47

[2nd], [Gain]

Echo to Echo

72

48

[2nd], [Zoom]

Note

73

49

[2nd], [ID#]

Slew Left

76

4C

[ ]

Escape

77

4D

[2nd], [Meas]

Slew Right

82

52

[ ]

Print

84

54

[2nd], [Send]

Slew up

85

55

[ ]

Zoom

90

5A

[Zoom]

File

92

5C

[File]

Status

94

5E

[2nd], [6]

Alarm

97

61

[2nd], [8]

Light

98

62

[Light]

Cal

99

63

[Cal]

Diff

100

64

[2nd], [9]

Clear Memory

101

65

[2nd], [FILE]

Freeze

102

66

[Freeze]

Recall Setup

103

67

[RECALL
SETUP]

ID

105

69

[ID#]

Delay

108

6C

[2nd], [Range]

Meas

109

6D

[Meas]

Send

110

6E

[Send]

Table 18

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

COMMAND Syntax

Command Syntax (Continued) (Continued)

OOV

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Command Name

COMMAND Syntax
ASCII
Character

Dec

Hex

Corresponding
Gage Key
Stroke(s)

Enter

112

70

[Enter]

Range

114

72

[Range]

Save

115

73

[Save]

Single Send

116

74

[Send]

Units

117

75

[2nd], [3]

Velocity

118

76

[Vel]

Raw Data Send

119

77

None

Setup Adjust

120

78

[2nd], [1]

Zero

122

7A

[Zero]

Communication
Protocol change

43

2B

None
Note: Changes
comm protocol
from single to
multicharacter.

Table 18

OPM

Command Syntax (Continued) (Continued)

^=c=J=^=~=o~=m~

Appendix F - Accessories and Replacement Parts

Description

Part #

Carrying Case

36DLPLUS/CC

Heavy Duty Carrying Case Assembly

26DLPLUS/HDC

Small Protective Pouch Kit, including chest


harness and waist strap

36DLP/SPC/KIT

Manual

910-231

Pocket Instruction Card

25DLP/PIC

Interface Program
CD-ROM (Standard)
3 1/2" DD Diskette (Upon Request)

WIN25DLPLUS

Printer-Portable, Battery or 115 VAC,


Thermal,80 Column

36PR

Printer-Portable, Battery or 230 VAC,


Thermal, 80 Column

36PRE

Paper for Printer, 1 box (5 rolls)

80PP

Dummy Plug Set

36DLP/PS

Battery-NiCad Rechargeable Alkaline Battery


Clip

36DLP/BP
36DLP/AA

Software Upgrade

25MMP/SU

Remote Save Handswitch

36DLP/RSA/H

Remote Send Handswitch

36DLP/RSE/H

Remote Save Footswitch

36DLP/RSA

Remote Send Footswitch

36DLP/RSE

Extended Warranty 1 Year

25MMP/EW

Bar Code Wand

36DLP/BCW

RS-232 I/O CABLES


9-Pin Female D (6 feet)

36DLC/9F-6

9-Pin Female D (12 feet)

36DLC/9F-12

25-Pin Male D (6 feet)

36DLC/25M-6

25-Pin Male D (12 feet)

36DLC/25M-12

Table 19

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Accessories and Replacement Parts

OPN

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Description

Part #

25-Pin Female D (6 feet)

36DLC/25F-6

25-Pin Female D (12 feet)

36DLC/25F-12

Cable for Portable Printers

36DLC/9M/PR-6

UNIVERSAL CHARGER/AC ADAPTERS

36CAPLUS

North America, South America, Japan, Korea

2111

EuropeanAustria, Belgium, Finland, France,


Germany, Netherlands, Sweden, Norway, Israel,
and Greece

1514

Australia

1515

United Kingdom

1516

Italy

1517

Denmark

1518

India, Pakistan, South Africa, Hong-Kong

1519

COUPLANT
Propylene Glycol

Couplant A-2, 2 oz. (.06 liter)

Glycerin

Couplant B-2, 2 oz (.06 liter)

Gel Type

Couplant D-12, 12 oz. (.35 liter)

Ultratherm-High Temp up to 1000F

Couplant E-2, 2 oz. (.06 liter)

Medium Temp up to 500F

Couplant F-2, 2 oz. (.06 liter)

TEST BLOCKS
5-Step, 1018 Steel
English Units; .100", .200", .300", .400", .500"

2214E

5-Step, 1018 Steel


Metric Units; 2.5, 5, 7.5, 10, 12.5 mm

2214M

5-Step, Aluminum
English Units; .100", .200", .300", .400", .500"

2213E

4-Step, 1018 Steel


English Units; .250", .500", .750", 1.500"

2212E

2-Step, 303 Stainless Steel


English Units; .050", .1500"
Metric Units; 1, 15 mm

2218E
2218M

Table 19

OPO

Accessories and Replacement Parts (Continued)

^=c=J=^=~=o~=m~

Description

Part #

2-Step, 303 Stainless Steel,


English Units; .200", 1.500"
Metric Units; 5, 30 mm

2219E
2219M

Table 19

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Accessories and Replacement Parts (Continued)

OPP

j=ORjriqf=mirp

OPQ

Index
Numerics
2-D Matrix Grid file type 122126
2-D Matrix Grid with Custom Point
file type 126129
3-D Custom file type 132135
3-D Matrix Grid file type 129132
A
Accessories and replacement parts
231233
Active measurement 57
changing 5759
Alarm
High/Low 68
Previous Thickness 7072
Standard 6870
Application setups 185
Audience 18
B
Backlight 50, 78
Bar Code Wand 153154
Battery
AA alkaline 29, 30
charging 2930
internal 6V 29
NiCad battery pack 29
replacing 30
status meter 29
troubleshooting 172
Beeper Tone 75
Blank mode 73
C
Calibrating 42, 45, 185
Mode 1 with Barrier Layer 45
Mode 2 with Barrier Layer 46
Velocity and Zero 4243
Velocity only 4344
Zero only 4445
Calibration lock 73

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

Charger
toubleshooting 172
Clock 88
Comment table
creating or editing from a
computer 141
creating or editing from the Model
25MULTI PLUS 141
deleting comments 141
Comments 109110
saving 147
Communication mode 8182
Communication parameters 163165
Communication reset 166167, 167
168
Continuous output option 83
Creating files
from a computer 111
from the Model 25MULTI PLUS
112113
Custom setups 89
D
Data
erasing data in an active/open
file 151
saving 143
Data files
creating 110
Data output formats 165166, 195
221
Database
erasing 152153
Datalogger 105107
comment structure 109110
file name header structure 108
file name structure 107
identifier (ID number) structure
107108
oganizing 107
Datalogger resets 166167
DBase reset 168169

OPR

j=ORjriqf=mirp

DBase tracking 84
Default setup 3941
Delay function 4748
Detect mode 8991
Mode 1 8990
Mode 2 90
Mode 3 9091
Diagnostics mode 84, 173174
error status 86, 176
hardware control 85
hardware status 85, 174176
keypad test 85, 174
video display test 85, 174
Differential mode
Normal Differential 6162
Percent Ratio 62
Display 2729
Documentation
related documentation 20
revision history 20
sending comments 20
typographic conventions 19
E
Echo 1 Detect 9798
Echo 2 Detect 9798
Echo Window
viewing 9597
Edit ID mode 149151
Editing commands 110111
Erasing data 151153
Error messages 172
F
File
copying 136137
deleting 138139
editing/renaming 139140
erasing 152
opening 135136
File name header structure 108
File name structure 107

OPS

File type
2-D Matrix Grid 122126
2-D Matrix Grid with Custom
Point 126129
3-D Custom 132135
3-D Matrix Grid 129132
Incremental 113116
Sequential 116118
Sequential with Custom Point
119121
Filled trace 7778
Freeze mode 7374
Full Wave 74
H
Half Wave Negative 74
Half Wave Positive 74
Help 176
Hold mode 73
I
ID number structure 107108
ID overwrite protection 8081
Inactive time 76
Incremental 113
Incremental file type 113116
Initial Gain
defining 9394
Interface Blank 99100
K
Key selection
saving 79
Keypad functions 2127
L
Language 76
M
Main Bang Blank
viewing 9495

Maintenance
routine 171
transducers 172
Maximum Gain
defining 9293
Maximum measure mode 28
Maximum thickness mode 6667
MeasType 91
Measurement
troubleshooting 173
Measurement Display Update Rate
6365
Measurement mode
Mode 1 32
Mode 2 32
Mode 3 32
Measurement Setup mode 75
Backlight 78
Beeper Tone 75
filled trace 7778
Inactive time 76
Language 76
Radix Point 76
Supervisor Lock 79
unfilled trace 7778
Metric units 74
Minimum measure mode 28
Minimum thickness mode 6566
Mode 1 Barrier Layer measurement
101102
Mode 2 Barrier Layer measurement
102103
Mode 3 Echo Blank 100101
Multi-Measurement description 51
52
Multi-Measurement feature 5051
Multi-measurement mode
auto-increment active 145
save active 144
saving thickness readings 144
147
N

operating 5253
Note
copying 142143
P
PCT Thickness mode 52
operating 5557
Performance and accuracy 3335
Probe type
defining 91
Product description 17
Pulser power
effects 92
Q
Quick setup 41, 81
R
Radix Point 76
Range
adjusting 4647
Receiving files from a computer 161
162
Rectification mode 74
Full Wave 74
Half Wave Negative 74
Half Wave Positive 74
Remote Control
via RS-232 223230
Reports
generating 154156
Resets 86
communication reset 87, 167168
DBase reset 87, 168169
master reset 88
measurement reset 86
Review ID mode 148149
RS-232 cables 162
S
Sending a range of ID numbers from a
file 159160

Normal mode 51

m~=@=VNMJOPN_

OPT

j=ORjriqf=mirp

Sending a snapshot
to a printer 161
using the WIN25DL PLUS, to a
computer 160
Sending entire files to computer or
printer 158159
Sequential file type 116118
Sequential with Custom Point file
type 119121
Serial communications 162
Serial interface
electrical definition and data
format 194
mechanical description 193194
Setup adjustment 101
Setup name
defining 91
Setup parameters 103104
Setup, initial 3738
Single send to a computer or printer
160
Soft Contact mode 52
operating 5355
Sound velocities 191192
SP modes 7475
Standard editing commands 110111
Summarizing 21
Supervisor Lock 79
T
TDG Slope
defining 94
Technical specifications 177190
battery and charger 188
datalogger 181183
display 178
functions 183185

OPU

general 188
measurement 180181
packaging 177
power 177
special gage functions 189190
Theory of operation 3133
Thickness and Waveform
saving 144
Thickness measurements
making 38
Thickness readings
saving 144
Thickness resolution
changing 7273
Transducer Setup
uploading/downloading to a
computer 162
Transmitting data to a computer or
printer 157158
Typographic conventions 19
U
Unfilled trace 7778
User-Defined setup 3941
W
Warranty 3
WIN25DL PLUS interface program
169
Z
Zoom mode 28, 48
Mode 1 48
Mode 2 49
Mode 3 49

Documentation Comments
Panametrics-NDTTM is always interested in improving its documentation. Please
complete this questionnaire and return your responses to:
Panametrics-NDT
Attention: NDT Marketing Dept., Technical Publications
You can also email your comments to: info@Panametrics-NDT.com, Attention
Technical Publications.
Thank you for helping us improve our documentation!
Note:

The following questionnaire is adapted from the Judging Form from the
Boston Chapter, Society for Technical Communication, Technical
Publications Competition, and Revision Checklist from John Lannons
Technical Writing, Seventh Edition (Addison Wesley Longman, 1997).

Document title : _____________________________________________________


Document number: __________________________________________________
Documentation Usability Ratings

In the sections that follow, please rate the usability of the document according to the
following rating system:
1 - Poor

2 - Below Average

3 - Average

4 - Above Average

5 - Excellent

Audience and purpose

Is the purpose of this manual clearly stated?

Does the document fulfill the purpose?

Is the audience clearly defined?

Does the document meet the audiences needs?

Do the instructions follow the exact sequence of steps?

Is the organization appropriate and logical at all levels?

Are the headings specific and helpful?

Is the Table of Contents complete and useful?

Is the index comprehensive, easy to use, and cross-referenced?

Do explanations enable readers to understand what to do?

Do notes, cautions, or warnings appear whenever needed,


in the appropriate place?

Organization

Content

Is everything accurate?

Are the main points properly stressed?

Are there sufficient helpful examples?

Are the tone and style appropriate for the purpose and audience? 1

Is terminology consistent?

Are grammar, syntax, spelling, and punctuation correct?

Do the illustrations contribute to the usefulness of the document? 1

Are the illustrations effectively integrated into the text?

Are the illustrations clearly labelled?

Is the layout effective for the audience and purpose?

Is the overall design consistent and coherent?

Overall Document

Writing and Editing

Is the reading level appropriate to the audience?

Illustrations

Layout and Design

Additional Comments

Which topics are not covered that you would like to see covered in the next revision?
_____________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________
Errors found in this manual:
Page

Description of Error

_______

________________________________________________________

_______

________________________________________________________

_______

________________________________________________________

Name _________________________ Company_____________________________


Mailing Address _____________________________________________________
___________________________________________________________________
Phone_________________________ E-Mail Address________________________
Fax No. ____________________________________________________________

Você também pode gostar